Revert 415fa612
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
6f2750fe 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
6f2750fe 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
6f2750fe 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
26278bb8
UD
831@kindex --push-state
832@cindex push state governing input file handling
833@item --push-state
834The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848something as follows:
849
850@smallexample
851-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852@end smallexample
853
854@kindex --pop-state
855@cindex pop state governing input file handling
856Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857flags governing input file handling.
858
a712da20
NC
859@kindex -q
860@kindex --emit-relocs
861@cindex retain relocations in final executable
862@item -q
863@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 864Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
865Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867in larger executables.
868
dbab7a7b
NC
869This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
4f471f39
RS
871@kindex --force-dynamic
872@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873@item --force-dynamic
874Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875to VxWorks targets.
876
252b5132
RH
877@cindex partial link
878@cindex relocatable output
879@kindex -r
1049f94e 880@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 881@item -r
1049f94e 882@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 883Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 884turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
885linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 888@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
889If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
62bf86b4
HPN
893When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897with input files in other formats at all.
898
252b5132
RH
899This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901@kindex -R @var{file}
902@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903@cindex symbol-only input
904@item -R @var{filename}
905@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
ff5dcc92 911For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 912followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 913the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
914
915@kindex -s
916@kindex --strip-all
917@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 918@item -s
252b5132
RH
919@itemx --strip-all
920Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922@kindex -S
923@kindex --strip-debug
924@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 925@item -S
252b5132
RH
926@itemx --strip-debug
927Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929@kindex -t
930@kindex --trace
931@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 932@item -t
252b5132 933@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 934Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -T @var{script}
937@kindex --script=@var{script}
938@cindex script files
939@item -T @var{scriptfile}
940@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 942@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 943@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
944output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947options accumulate.
252b5132 948
14be8564
L
949@kindex -dT @var{script}
950@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951@cindex script files
952@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963@samp{gcc}).
964
252b5132
RH
965@kindex -u @var{symbol}
966@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967@cindex undefined symbol
968@item -u @var{symbol}
969@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
0a618243
AB
976If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
977into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
978undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
979instead.
980
981@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
982@cindex symbols, require defined
983@cindex defined symbol
984@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
985Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
986is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
987is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
988and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
989@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
990can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
991
252b5132
RH
992@kindex -Ur
993@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 994@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
995For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
996@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 997turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
998@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
999It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1000with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1001be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1002@samp{-r} for the others.
1003
c005eb9e
AB
1004@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1005@cindex orphan sections
1006@cindex sections, orphan
1007@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1008Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1009specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1010
1011@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1012
1013@table @code
1014@item place
1015Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1016the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1017@samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1018
1019@item discard
1020All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1021@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1022
1023@item warn
1024The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1025issue a warning.
1026
1027@item error
1028The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1029@end table
1030
1031The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1032
577a0623
AM
1033@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1034@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1035Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1036@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1037missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1038specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1039multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1040input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1041in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1042
252b5132
RH
1043@kindex -v
1044@kindex -V
1045@kindex --version
1046@cindex version
1047@item -v
1048@itemx --version
1049@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1050Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1051lists the supported emulations.
1052
1053@kindex -x
1054@kindex --discard-all
1055@cindex deleting local symbols
1056@item -x
1057@itemx --discard-all
1058Delete all local symbols.
1059
1060@kindex -X
1061@kindex --discard-locals
1062@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1063@item -X
252b5132 1064@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1065Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1066system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1067or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1068
1069@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1070@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1071@cindex symbol tracing
1072@item -y @var{symbol}
1073@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1074Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1075option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1076to prepend an underscore.
1077
1078This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1079don't know where the reference is coming from.
1080
1081@kindex -Y @var{path}
1082@item -Y @var{path}
1083Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1084for Solaris compatibility.
1085
1086@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1087@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1088The recognized keywords are:
1089@table @samp
1090
1091@item combreloc
1092Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1093lookup caching possible.
1094
b8871f35
L
1095@item common
1096Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1097link.
1098
cd6d6c15 1099@item defs
560e09e9 1100Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1101shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1102
6aa29e7b
JJ
1103@item execstack
1104Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1105
b039ef04
L
1106@item global
1107This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1108the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1109of subsequently loaded libraries.
1110
cd6d6c15
NC
1111@item initfirst
1112This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1113It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1114before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1115the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1116the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1117objects.
1118
1119@item interpose
1120Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1121but the primary executable.
1122
5fa222e4
AM
1123@item lazy
1124When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1125dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1126the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1127Lazy binding is the default.
1128
cd6d6c15
NC
1129@item loadfltr
1130Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1131runtime.
1132
1133@item muldefs
1134Allows multiple definitions.
1135
1136@item nocombreloc
1137Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1138
b8871f35
L
1139@item nocommon
1140Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1141link.
1142
cd6d6c15 1143@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1144Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1145defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1146
1147@item nodefaultlib
1148Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1149ignore any default library search paths.
1150
1151@item nodelete
1152Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1153
1154@item nodlopen
1155Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1156
1157@item nodump
1158Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1159
6aa29e7b
JJ
1160@item noexecstack
1161Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1162
8dfef1bd
L
1163@item text
1164Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1165
1166@item notext
1167Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1168
1169@item textoff
1170Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1171
6aa29e7b
JJ
1172@item norelro
1173Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1174
cd6d6c15
NC
1175@item now
1176When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1177dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1178when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1179deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1180first called.
1181
1182@item origin
1183Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1184
6aa29e7b
JJ
1185@item relro
1186Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1187
24718e3b
L
1188@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1189Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1190
1191@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1192Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1193
04c3a755
NS
1194@item stack-size=@var{value}
1195Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1196Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1197@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1198
d258b828
IZ
1199@item bndplt
1200Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1201
889c2a67
L
1202@item noextern-protected-data
1203Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1204library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1205to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1206generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
4dba69b9 1207module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
889c2a67
L
1208i386 and x86-64.
1209
aec6b87e
L
1210@item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1211Don't treat undefined weak symbols as dynamic when building executable.
1212This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used to avoid
1213dynamic relocations against undefined weak symbols in executable.
1214Supported for i386 and x86-64.
1215
4c10bbaa
L
1216@item noreloc-overflow
1217Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1218relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1219overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1220
caa65211
L
1221@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1222@itemx call-nop=prefix-nop
1223@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1224@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1225@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1226Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1227to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1228@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1229@option{call-nop=prefix-nop} generates @code{0x90 call foo}.
1230@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1231@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1232@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1233Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1234
cd6d6c15
NC
1235@end table
1236
ece2d90e 1237Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1238
1239@kindex -(
1240@cindex groups of archives
1241@item -( @var{archives} -)
1242@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1243The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1244either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1245
1246The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1247references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1248the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1249archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1250object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1251would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1252they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1253resolved.
1254
1255Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1256it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1257more archives.
1258
69da35b5
NC
1259@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1260@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1261@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1262@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1263Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1264recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1265and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1266the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1267behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1268so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1269restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1270
4a43e768
AM
1271@kindex --as-needed
1272@kindex --no-as-needed
1273@item --as-needed
1274@itemx --no-as-needed
1275This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1276on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1277the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1278on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1279needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1280emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1281non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1282the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1283non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1284Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1285the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1286needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1287from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1288
e56f61be
L
1289@kindex --add-needed
1290@kindex --no-add-needed
1291@item --add-needed
1292@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1293These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1294their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1295options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1296and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1297
252b5132
RH
1298@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1299@item -assert @var{keyword}
1300This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1301
1302@kindex -Bdynamic
1303@kindex -dy
1304@kindex -call_shared
1305@item -Bdynamic
1306@itemx -dy
1307@itemx -call_shared
1308Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1309for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1310default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1311for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1312multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1313@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1314
a1ab1d2a
UD
1315@kindex -Bgroup
1316@item -Bgroup
1317Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1318section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1319object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1320@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1321only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1322
252b5132
RH
1323@kindex -Bstatic
1324@kindex -dn
1325@kindex -non_shared
1326@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1327@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1328@itemx -dn
1329@itemx -non_shared
1330@itemx -static
1331Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1332platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1333variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1334may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1335library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1336option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1337option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1338shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1339references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1340libraries.
252b5132
RH
1341
1342@kindex -Bsymbolic
1343@item -Bsymbolic
1344When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1345definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1346for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1347within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1348@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1349executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1350the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1351support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1352
40b36307
L
1353@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1354@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1355When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1356symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1357This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1358when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1359to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1360This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1361libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1362
55255dae
L
1363@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1364@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1365Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1366typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1367global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1368within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1369to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1370in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1371which support shared libraries.
1372
1373The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1374scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1375
40b36307
L
1376@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1377@item --dynamic-list-data
1378Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1379
1380@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1381@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1382Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1383is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1384
0b8a70d9
L
1385@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1386@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1387Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1388
252b5132
RH
1389@kindex --check-sections
1390@kindex --no-check-sections
1391@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1392@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1393Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1394been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1395perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1396suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1397allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1398restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1399Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1400force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1401option.
252b5132 1402
ddbb8a31
NC
1403@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1404@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1405@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1406@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1407This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1408by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1409command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1410output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1411input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1412specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1413follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1414behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1415
1416This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1417libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1418mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1419their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1420required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1421the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1422dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1423symbols.
1424
252b5132
RH
1425@cindex cross reference table
1426@kindex --cref
1427@item --cref
1428Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1429generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1430Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1431
1432The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1433easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1434sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1435symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1436definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1437where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1438symbol are listed.
252b5132 1439
4818e05f
AM
1440@cindex common allocation
1441@kindex --no-define-common
1442@item --no-define-common
1443This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1444The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1445@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1446
1447The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1448the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1449of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1450forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1451Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1452from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1453This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1454and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1455duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1456paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1457
252b5132 1458@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1459@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1460@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1461Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1462address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1463times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1464limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1465context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1466symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1467constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1468using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1469@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1470equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1471
1472@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1473@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1474@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1475@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1476@itemx --no-demangle
1477These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1478and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1479present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1480underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1481mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1482different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1483to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1484demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1485is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1486
1487@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1488@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1489@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1490@item -I@var{file}
1491@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1492Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1493generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1494linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1495doing.
1496
9b8b325a
RF
1497@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1498@item --no-dynamic-linker
1499When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1500linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1501executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1502entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1503
7ce691ae 1504@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1505@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1506@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1507@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1508Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1509with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1510
252b5132
RH
1511@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1512@item --force-exe-suffix
1513Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1514
1515If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1516@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1517the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1518option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1519Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1520it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1521
1522@kindex --gc-sections
1523@kindex --no-gc-sections
1524@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1525@item --gc-sections
1526@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1527Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1528targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1529performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1530@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1531collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1532implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1533
d5465ba2
AM
1534@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1535examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1536symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1537command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1538referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1539libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1540referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1541the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1542relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1543
ac69cbc6 1544This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1545@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1546specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1547a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1548
c17d87de
NC
1549@kindex --print-gc-sections
1550@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1551@cindex garbage collection
1552@item --print-gc-sections
1553@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1554List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1555printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1556collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1557default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1558be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1559line.
1560
30824704
RM
1561@kindex --print-output-format
1562@cindex output format
1563@item --print-output-format
1564Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1565other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1566in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1567
3604cb1f
TG
1568@kindex --print-memory-usage
1569@cindex memory usage
1570@item --print-memory-usage
1571Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1572the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1573quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1574headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1575parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1576
1577@smallexample
1578Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1579 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1580 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1581@end smallexample
1582
252b5132
RH
1583@cindex help
1584@cindex usage
1585@kindex --help
1586@item --help
1587Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1588
ea20a7da
CC
1589@kindex --target-help
1590@item --target-help
1591Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1592
2509a395
SL
1593@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1594@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1595Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1596@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1597
1598@cindex memory usage
1599@kindex --no-keep-memory
1600@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1601@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1602symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1603instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1604necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1605while linking a large executable.
1606
1607@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1608@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1609@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1610@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1611Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1612is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1613The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1614behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1615libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1616
aa713662
L
1617@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1618@kindex -z muldefs
1619@item --allow-multiple-definition
1620@itemx -z muldefs
1621Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1622report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1623first definition will be used.
1624
b79e8c78 1625@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1626@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1627@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1628@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1629Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1630This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1631determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1632shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1633how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1634
903249d7
NC
1635The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1636referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1637an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1638a shared library.
1639
1640The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1641libraries specified at link time are that:
1642
1643@itemize @bullet
1644@item
1645A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1646that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1647resolvable at load time.
1648@item
1649There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1650symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1651
1652The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1653select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1654architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1655appropriate memset function.
1656@end itemize
b79e8c78 1657
31941635
L
1658@kindex --no-undefined-version
1659@item --no-undefined-version
1660Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1661it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1662will be issued instead.
1663
3e3b46e5
PB
1664@kindex --default-symver
1665@item --default-symver
1666Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1667exported symbols.
1668
1669@kindex --default-imported-symver
1670@item --default-imported-symver
1671Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1672imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1673
252b5132
RH
1674@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1675@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1676Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1677files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1678been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1679This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1680errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1681have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1682inappropriate.
1683
fe7929ce
AM
1684@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1685@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1686Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1687library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1688
252b5132
RH
1689@kindex --no-whole-archive
1690@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1691Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1692archive files.
1693
1694@cindex output file after errors
1695@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1696@item --noinhibit-exec
1697Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1698Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1699errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1700when it issues any error whatsoever.
1701
0a9c1c8e
CD
1702@kindex -nostdlib
1703@item -nostdlib
1704Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1705command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1706(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1707
252b5132 1708@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1709@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1710@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1711@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1712file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1713@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1714object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1715object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1716should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1717usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1718name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1719list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1720command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1721this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1722@end ifclear
1723
36af4a4e
JJ
1724@kindex -pie
1725@kindex --pic-executable
1726@item -pie
1727@itemx --pic-executable
1728@cindex position independent executables
1729Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1730ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1731libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1732address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1733normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1734defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1735
252b5132
RH
1736@kindex -qmagic
1737@item -qmagic
1738This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1739
1740@kindex -Qy
1741@item -Qy
1742This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1743
1744@kindex --relax
1745@cindex synthesizing linker
1746@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1747@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1748@item --relax
28d5f677 1749@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1750An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1751@ifset GENERIC
1752This option is only supported on a few targets.
1753@end ifset
1754@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1755@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1756@end ifset
1757@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1758@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1759@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1760@ifset XTENSA
1761@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1762@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1763@ifset M68HC11
1764@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1765@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1766@ifset NIOSII
1767@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1768@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1769@ifset POWERPC
1770@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1771@end ifset
252b5132 1772
28d5f677
NC
1773On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1774global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1775addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1776synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1777instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1778
1779On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1780debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1781@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1782This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1783family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1784@end ifset
1785
1786@ifset GENERIC
1787On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1788but ignored.
1789@end ifset
1790
28d5f677
NC
1791On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1792@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1793
252b5132
RH
1794@cindex retaining specified symbols
1795@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1796@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1797@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1798@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1799Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1800discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1801symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1802@ifset GENERIC
1803(such as VxWorks)
1804@end ifset
1805where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1806run-time memory.
1807
1808@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1809or symbols needed for relocations.
1810
1811You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1812line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1813
1814@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1815@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1816@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1817@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1818Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1819linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1820arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1821them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1822also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1823objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1824@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1825ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1826@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1827
ff5dcc92 1828The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1829SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1830@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1831runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1832options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1833gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1834file systems.
252b5132 1835
ff5dcc92 1836For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1837followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1838the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1839@end ifset
1840
1841@ifset GENERIC
1842@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1843@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1844@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1845When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1846happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1847of the input files.
1848
1849When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1850non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1851shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1852explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1853specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1854@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1855either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1856appearing multiple times.
1857
28c309a2
NC
1858This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1859that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1860is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1861runtime linker would do.
1862
252b5132 1863The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1864libraries:
252b5132
RH
1865@enumerate
1866@item
ff5dcc92 1867Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1868@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1869Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1870between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1871specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1872used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1873at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1874by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1875the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1876@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1877On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1878@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1879environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1880@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1881On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1882directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1883@item
a1b8d843 1884For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1885variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1886@item
ec4eb78a
L
1887For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1888@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1889libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1890@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1891@item
252b5132
RH
1892The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1893@item
1894For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1895exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1896@end enumerate
1897
1898If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1899warning and continue with the link.
1900@end ifset
1901
1902@kindex -shared
1903@kindex -Bshareable
1904@item -shared
1905@itemx -Bshareable
1906@cindex shared libraries
1907Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1908and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1909shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1910undefined symbols in the link.
1911
252b5132 1912@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1913@item --sort-common
1914@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1915@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1916This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1917ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1918sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1919eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1920between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1921specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1922
2509a395
SL
1923@kindex --sort-section=name
1924@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1925This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1926patterns in the linker script.
1927
2509a395
SL
1928@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1929@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1930This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1931patterns in the linker script.
1932
252b5132 1933@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1934@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1935Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1936each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1937size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1938
1939@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1940@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1941Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1942output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1943This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1944certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1945cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1946that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1947support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1948input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1949more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1950many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1951
1952@kindex --stats
1953@item --stats
1954Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1955as execution time and memory usage.
1956
2509a395 1957@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1958@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1959Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1960configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1961that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1962
252b5132
RH
1963@kindex --traditional-format
1964@cindex traditional format
1965@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1966For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1967the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1968use the traditional format instead.
1969
1970@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1971For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1972symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1973full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1974@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1975trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1976combine duplicate entries.
1977
2509a395
SL
1978@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1979@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1980Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1981address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1982times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1983line.
1984@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1985for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1986@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1987should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1988sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1989
2509a395
SL
1990@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1991@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1992@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1993@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1994@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1995@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1996@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1997Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1998@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1999
2509a395
SL
2000@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2001@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2002@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2003When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2004byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2005
9d5777a3
RM
2006@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2007@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2008@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2009When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2010the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2011text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2012
0d705e9f
AM
2013@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2014@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2015@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2016When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2017model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2018
560e09e9
NC
2019@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2020@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2021Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2022values for @samp{method}:
2023
2024@table @samp
2025@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2026Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2027
2028@item report-all
da8bce14 2029Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2030
2031@item ignore-in-object-files
2032Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2033ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2034
2035@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2036Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2037ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2038when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2039libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2040command line.
2041@end table
2042
2043The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2044by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2045
2046Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2047unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2048can change this to a warning.
2049
1715a13c
L
2050@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2051@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2052@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2053@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2054Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2055supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2056the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2057argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2058
2059@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2060@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2061@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2062Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2063used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2064about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2065is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2066see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2067use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2068symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2069@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2070
7ce691ae 2071@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2072@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2073@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2074@item --warn-common
2075Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2076a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2077but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2078you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2079Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2080warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2081
2082There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2083
2084@table @samp
2085@item int i = 1;
2086A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2087file.
2088
2089@item extern int i;
2090An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2091There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2092variable somewhere.
2093
2094@item int i;
2095A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2096variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2097The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2098single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2099size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2100a definition of the same variable.
2101@end table
2102
2103The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2104Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2105just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2106encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2107a common symbol.
2108
2109@enumerate
2110@item
2111Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2112definition for the symbol.
2113@smallexample
2114@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2115 overridden by definition
2116@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2117@end smallexample
2118
2119@item
2120Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2121the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2122except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2123@smallexample
2124@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2125 overriding common
2126@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2127@end smallexample
2128
2129@item
2130Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2131@smallexample
2132@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2133 of `@var{symbol}'
2134@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2135@end smallexample
2136
2137@item
2138Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2139@smallexample
2140@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2141 overridden by larger common
2142@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2143@end smallexample
2144
2145@item
2146Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2147the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2148encountered in a different order.
2149@smallexample
2150@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2151 overriding smaller common
2152@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2153@end smallexample
2154@end enumerate
2155
2156@kindex --warn-constructors
2157@item --warn-constructors
2158Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2159object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2160detect the use of global constructors.
2161
2162@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2163@item --warn-multiple-gp
2164Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2165This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2166Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2167section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2168of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2169base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2170base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2171bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2172large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2173values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2174option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2175
2176@kindex --warn-once
2177@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2178@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2179@item --warn-once
2180Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2181which refers to it.
2182
2183@kindex --warn-section-align
2184@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2185@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2186@item --warn-section-align
2187Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2188alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2189The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2190is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2191the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2192
8fdd7217
NC
2193@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2194@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2195Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2196
a0c402a5
L
2197@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2198@item --warn-alternate-em
2199Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2200
560e09e9
NC
2201@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2202@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2203If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2204@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2205This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2206
2207@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2208@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2209This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2210it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2211
252b5132
RH
2212@kindex --whole-archive
2213@cindex including an entire archive
2214@item --whole-archive
2215For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2216@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2217in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2218files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2219library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2220library. This option may be used more than once.
2221
7ec229ce 2222Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2223about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2224Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2225list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2226your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2227
2509a395
SL
2228@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2229@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2230Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2231@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2232undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2233@var{symbol}.
2234
2235This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2236wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2237wishes to call the system function, it should call
2238@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2239
2240Here is a trivial example:
2241
2242@smallexample
2243void *
cc2f008e 2244__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2245@{
cc2f008e 2246 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2247 return __real_malloc (c);
2248@}
2249@end smallexample
2250
ff5dcc92 2251If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2252all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2253instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2254call the real @code{malloc} function.
2255
2256You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2257links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2258you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2259file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2260call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2261
6aa29e7b
JJ
2262@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2263@item --eh-frame-hdr
2264Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2265@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2266
e41b3a13
JJ
2267@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2268@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2269Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2270generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2271if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2272
6c1439be
L
2273@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2274@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2275@item --enable-new-dtags
2276@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2277This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2278systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2279@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2280and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2281If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2282created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2283those options are only available for ELF systems.
2284
2d643429 2285@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2286@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2287Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2288close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2289time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2290increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2291value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2292
fdc90cb4
JJ
2293@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2294@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2295Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2296@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2297new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2298the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2299hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2300
0ce398f1
L
2301@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2302@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2303@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2304@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2305@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2306@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2307@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2308@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2309On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2310compressed using zlib. @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
19a7fe52
L
2311compress DWARF debug sections.
2312@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
0ce398f1 2313sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
19a7fe52
L
2314instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2315and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2316compress DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
6c3bc0f8
NC
2317The default behaviour varies depending upon the target involved and
2318the configure options used to build the toolchain. The default can be
2319determined by examing the output from the linker's @option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2320
35835446
JR
2321@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2322@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2323This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2324linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2325for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2326about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2327
4f9c04f7 2328Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 23291021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2330run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2331has been used.
2332
2333The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2334enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2335
c0065db7
RM
2336@kindex --build-id
2337@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2338@item --build-id
2339@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2340Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2341or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2342unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2343@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2344@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2345@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2346the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2347string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2348@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2349is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2350
2351The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2352that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2353unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2354to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2355file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2356string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2357
2358Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2359@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2360@end table
2361
0285c67d
NC
2362@c man end
2363
36f63dca 2364@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2365
0285c67d
NC
2366@c man begin OPTIONS
2367
ff5dcc92 2368The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2369the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2370normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2371use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2372@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2373like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2374symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2375object file).
2376
2377In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2378support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2379PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2380values by either a space or an equals sign.
2381
ff5dcc92 2382@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2383
2384@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2385@item --add-stdcall-alias
2386If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2387as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2388[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2389
2390@kindex --base-file
2391@item --base-file @var{file}
2392Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2393addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2394@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2395[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2396
2397@kindex --dll
2398@item --dll
2399Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2400@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2401file.
bb10df36 2402[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2403
88183869
DK
2404@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2405@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2406@item --enable-long-section-names
2407@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2408The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2409the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2410for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2411fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2412to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2413allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2414disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2415generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2416as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2417with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2418GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2419information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2420option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2421section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2422when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2423image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2424[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2425
252b5132
RH
2426@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2427@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2428@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2429@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2430If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2431do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2432only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2433resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2434undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2435@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2436to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2437warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2438import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2439to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2440feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2441@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2442mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2443[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2444
522f09cd
KT
2445@kindex --leading-underscore
2446@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2447@item --leading-underscore
2448@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2449For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2450in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2451disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2452
252b5132
RH
2453@cindex DLLs, creating
2454@kindex --export-all-symbols
2455@item --export-all-symbols
2456If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2457be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2458otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2459explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2460attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2461option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2462@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2463@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2464exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2465re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2466such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2467@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2468@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2469Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2470not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2471extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2472(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2473These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2474@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2475@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2476@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2477@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2478[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2479
2480@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2481@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2482Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2483exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2484[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2485
2927aaca
NC
2486@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2487@item --exclude-all-symbols
2488Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2489[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2490
252b5132
RH
2491@kindex --file-alignment
2492@item --file-alignment
2493Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2494file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2495512.
bb10df36 2496[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2497
2498@cindex heap size
2499@kindex --heap
2500@item --heap @var{reserve}
2501@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2502Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2503to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2504committed.
bb10df36 2505[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2506
2507@cindex image base
2508@kindex --image-base
2509@item --image-base @var{value}
2510Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2511the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2512is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2513your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2514other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2515for dlls.
bb10df36 2516[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2517
2518@kindex --kill-at
2519@item --kill-at
2520If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2521symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2522[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2523
26d2d8a2
BF
2524@kindex --large-address-aware
2525@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2526If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2527header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2528greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2529or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2530section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2531[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2532
f69a2f97
NC
2533@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2534@item --disable-large-address-aware
2535Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2536This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2537driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2538addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2539[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2540
252b5132
RH
2541@kindex --major-image-version
2542@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2543Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2544[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2545
2546@kindex --major-os-version
2547@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2548Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2549[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2550
2551@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2552@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2553Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2554[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2555
2556@kindex --minor-image-version
2557@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2558Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2559[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2560
2561@kindex --minor-os-version
2562@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2563Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2564[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2565
2566@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2567@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2568Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2569[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2570
2571@cindex DEF files, creating
2572@cindex DLLs, creating
2573@kindex --output-def
2574@item --output-def @var{file}
2575The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2576file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2577(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2578library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2579automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2580[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2581
b044cda1
CW
2582@cindex DLLs, creating
2583@kindex --out-implib
2584@item --out-implib @var{file}
2585The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2586import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2587import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2588may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2589makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2590creation step.
bb10df36 2591[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2592
2593@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2594@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2595@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2596Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2597@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2598By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2599for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2600execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2601[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2602
2603@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2604@item --disable-auto-image-base
2605Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2606user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2607default.
bb10df36 2608[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2609
2610@cindex DLLs, linking to
2611@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2612@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2613When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2614search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2615@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2616between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2617uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2618@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2619[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2620
2621@kindex --enable-auto-import
2622@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2623Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2624DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2625building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2626'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2627to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2628specification published by Microsoft.
2629
e2a83dd0
NC
2630Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2631data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2632placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2633around a problem with consts that is described here:
2634http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2635
4d8907ac
DS
2636Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2637see this message:
0d888aac 2638
ece2d90e 2639"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2640documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2641
ece2d90e
NC
2642This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2643ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2644allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2645fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2646constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2647multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2648this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2649of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2650the warning, and exit.
2651
2652There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2653data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2654
2fa9fc65
NC
2655One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2656of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2657this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2658
c0065db7
RM
2659A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2660that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2661there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2662a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2663
2664@example
2665extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2666extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2667 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2668@end example
2669
2670or
2671
2672@example
2673extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2674extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2675 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2676@end example
2677
c0065db7 2678For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2679is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2680
2681@example
2682extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2683extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2684 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2685@end example
2686
c406afaf
NC
2687or
2688
2689@example
2690extern long long extern_ll;
2691extern_ll -->
2692 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2693@end example
2694
2fa9fc65 2695A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2696'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2697@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2698requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2699building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2700merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2701between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2702constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2703
2704Original:
2705@example
2706--foo.h
2707extern int arr[];
2708--foo.c
2709#include "foo.h"
2710void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2711 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2712@}
2713@end example
2714
2715Solution 1:
2716@example
2717--foo.h
2718extern int arr[];
2719--foo.c
2720#include "foo.h"
2721void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2722 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2723 volatile int *parr = arr;
2724 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2725@}
2726@end example
2727
2728Solution 2:
2729@example
2730--foo.h
2731/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2732#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2733 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2734#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2735#else
2736#define FOO_IMPORT
2737#endif
2738extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2739--foo.c
2740#include "foo.h"
2741void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2742 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2743@}
2744@end example
2745
c0065db7 2746A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2747library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2748for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2749functions).
bb10df36 2750[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2751
2752@kindex --disable-auto-import
2753@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2754Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2755@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2756[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2757
2fa9fc65
NC
2758@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2759@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2760If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2761that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2762a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2763environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2764[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2765
2766@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2767@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2768Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2769DLLs.
bb10df36 2770[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2771
b044cda1
CW
2772@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2773@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2774Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2775[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2776
252b5132
RH
2777@kindex --section-alignment
2778@item --section-alignment
2779Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2780addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2781[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2782
2783@cindex stack size
2784@kindex --stack
2785@item --stack @var{reserve}
2786@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2787Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2788to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2789committed.
bb10df36 2790[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2791
2792@kindex --subsystem
2793@item --subsystem @var{which}
2794@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2795@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2796Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2797legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2798@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2799the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2800@var{which}.
bb10df36 2801[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2802
2f563b51
DK
2803The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2804of the PE file header:
2805[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2806
2d5c3743
NC
2807@kindex --high-entropy-va
2808@item --high-entropy-va
2809Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2810(ASLR).
2811
2f563b51
DK
2812@kindex --dynamicbase
2813@item --dynamicbase
2814The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2815randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2816Vista for i386 PE targets.
2817
2818@kindex --forceinteg
2819@item --forceinteg
2820Code integrity checks are enforced.
2821
2822@kindex --nxcompat
2823@item --nxcompat
2824The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2825This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2826
2827@kindex --no-isolation
2828@item --no-isolation
2829Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2830
2831@kindex --no-seh
2832@item --no-seh
2833The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2834this image.
2835
2836@kindex --no-bind
2837@item --no-bind
2838Do not bind this image.
2839
2840@kindex --wdmdriver
2841@item --wdmdriver
2842The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2843
2f563b51
DK
2844@kindex --tsaware
2845@item --tsaware
2846The image is Terminal Server aware.
2847
0cb112f7
CF
2848@kindex --insert-timestamp
2849@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2850@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2851Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2852as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2853other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2854will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2855same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2856can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2857that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2858identically.
252b5132
RH
2859@end table
2860
0285c67d
NC
2861@c man end
2862
ac145307
BS
2863@ifset C6X
2864@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2865
2866@c man begin OPTIONS
2867
2868The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2869libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2870all executables use an index of 0.
2871
2872@table @gcctabopt
2873
2874@kindex --dsbt-size
2875@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2876This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2877or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2878entries.
2879
2880@kindex --dsbt-index
2881@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2882This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2883to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2884executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2885@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2886
fbd9ad90
PB
2887@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2888The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2889exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2890
ac145307
BS
2891@end table
2892
2893@c man end
2894@end ifset
2895
93fd0973
SC
2896@ifset M68HC11
2897@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2898
2899@c man begin OPTIONS
2900
2901The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2902memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2903
2904@table @gcctabopt
2905
2906@kindex --no-trampoline
2907@item --no-trampoline
2908This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2909is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2910instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2911
2912@kindex --bank-window
2913@item --bank-window @var{name}
2914This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2915the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2916The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2917paging and addresses within the memory window.
2918
2919@end table
2920
2921@c man end
2922@end ifset
2923
7fb9f789
NC
2924@ifset M68K
2925@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2926
2927@c man begin OPTIONS
2928
2929The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2930when linking for 68K targets.
2931
2932@table @gcctabopt
2933
2934@kindex --got
2935@item --got=@var{type}
2936This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2937@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2938@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2939Info entry for @file{ld}.
2940
2941@end table
2942
2943@c man end
2944@end ifset
2945
833794fc
MR
2946@ifset MIPS
2947@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2948
2949@c man begin OPTIONS
2950
2951The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2952generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2953
2954@table @gcctabopt
2955
2956@kindex --insn32
2957@item --insn32
2958@kindex --no-insn32
2959@itemx --no-insn32
2960These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2961generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2962or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
296332-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2964used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2965possible.
2966
2967@end table
2968
2969@c man end
2970@end ifset
2971
252b5132
RH
2972@ifset UsesEnvVars
2973@node Environment
2974@section Environment Variables
2975
0285c67d
NC
2976@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2977
560e09e9 2978You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2979@ifclear SingleFormat
2980@code{GNUTARGET},
2981@end ifclear
2982@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2983
36f63dca 2984@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2985@kindex GNUTARGET
2986@cindex default input format
2987@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2988use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2989of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2990@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2991of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2992attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2993this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2994there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2995object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2996BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2997in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2998@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2999
3000@kindex LDEMULATION
3001@cindex default emulation
3002@cindex emulation, default
3003@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3004@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3005behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3006available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3007the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3008variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3009linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3010
3011@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3012@cindex demangling, default
3013Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3014@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3015default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3016a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3017may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3018options.
3019
0285c67d
NC
3020@c man end
3021@end ifset
3022
252b5132
RH
3023@node Scripts
3024@chapter Linker Scripts
3025
3026@cindex scripts
3027@cindex linker scripts
3028@cindex command files
3029Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3030written in the linker command language.
3031
3032The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3033the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3034the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3035more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3036direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3037described below.
3038
3039The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3040yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3041linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3042to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3043such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3044
3045You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3046line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3047default linker script.
3048
3049You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3050to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3051Linker Scripts}.
3052
3053@menu
3054* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3055* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3056* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3057* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3058* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3059* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3060* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3061* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3062* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3063* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3064* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3065@end menu
3066
3067@node Basic Script Concepts
3068@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3069@cindex linker script concepts
3070We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3071describe the linker script language.
3072
3073The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3074file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3075@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3076The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3077purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3078among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3079section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3080in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3081
3082Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3083also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3084contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3085the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3086A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3087area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3088loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3089which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3090of debugging information.
3091
3092Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3093first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3094the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3095@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3096section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3097same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3098is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3099(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3100based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3101RAM address would be the VMA.
3102
3103You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3104program with the @samp{-h} option.
3105
3106Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3107@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3108has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3109information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3110will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3111static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3112referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3113
3114You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3115program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3116option.
3117
3118@node Script Format
3119@section Linker Script Format
3120@cindex linker script format
3121Linker scripts are text files.
3122
3123You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3124either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3125symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3126generally ignored.
3127
3128Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3129If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3130otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3131double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3132file name.
3133
3134You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3135@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3136to whitespace.
3137
3138@node Simple Example
3139@section Simple Linker Script Example
3140@cindex linker script example
3141@cindex example of linker script
3142Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3143
3144The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3145@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3146memory layout of the output file.
3147
3148The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3149describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3150code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3151@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3152Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3153your input files.
3154
3155For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
31560x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3157linker script which will do that:
3158@smallexample
3159SECTIONS
3160@{
3161 . = 0x10000;
3162 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3163 . = 0x8000000;
3164 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3165 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3166@}
3167@end smallexample
3168
3169You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3170followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3171descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3172
252b5132
RH
3173The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3174sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3175counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3176other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3177current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3178incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3179@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3180
3181The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3182required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3183after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3184which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3185wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3186means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3187
3188Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3189@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3190@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3191
3192The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3193the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3194at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3195output section, the value of the location counter will be
3196@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3197effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3198immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3199
3200The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3201alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3202example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3203sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3204may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3205sections.
3206
3207That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3208
3209@node Simple Commands
3210@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3211@cindex linker script simple commands
3212In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3213
3214@menu
3215* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3216* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3217@ifclear SingleFormat
3218* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3219@end ifclear
3220
4a93e180 3221* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3222* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3223@end menu
3224
3225@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3226@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3227@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3228@cindex start of execution
3229@cindex first instruction
3230@cindex entry point
3231The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3232point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3233entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3234@smallexample
3235ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3236@end smallexample
3237
3238There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3239entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3240stopping when one of them succeeds:
3241@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3242@item
252b5132 3243the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3244@item
252b5132 3245the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3246@item
3ab904c4
NC
3247the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3248targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3249check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3250@item
252b5132 3251the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3252@item
252b5132
RH
3253The address @code{0}.
3254@end itemize
3255
3256@node File Commands
36f63dca 3257@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3258@cindex linker script file commands
3259Several linker script commands deal with files.
3260
3261@table @code
3262@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3263@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3264@cindex including a linker script
3265Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3266be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3267with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
326810 levels deep.
3269
4006703d
NS
3270You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3271@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3272
252b5132
RH
3273@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3274@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3275@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3276@cindex input files in linker scripts
3277@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3278@cindex linker script input object files
3279The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3280in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3281
3282For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3283a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3284then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3285
3286In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3287script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3288
e3f2db7f
AO
3289In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3290with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3291located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3292for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3293open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3294linker will search through the archive library search path.
3295The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3296as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3297description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3298
ff5dcc92 3299If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3300name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3301@samp{-l}.
3302
3303When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3304files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3305script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3306
3307@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3308@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3309@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3310@cindex grouping input files
3311The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3312files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3313new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3314in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3315
b717d30e
JJ
3316@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3317@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3318@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3319This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3320commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3321as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3322with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3323when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3324@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3325and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3326setting afterwards.
3327
252b5132
RH
3328@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3329@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3330@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3331The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3332@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3333@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3334Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3335precedence.
3336
3337You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3338output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3339
3340@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3341@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3342@cindex library search path in linker script
3343@cindex archive search path in linker script
3344@cindex search path in linker script
3345The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3346@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3347@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3348on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3349are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3350the command line option are searched first.
3351
3352@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3353@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3354@cindex first input file
3355The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3356that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3357though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3358when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3359first file.
3360@end table
3361
3362@ifclear SingleFormat
3363@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3364@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3365A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3366
3367@table @code
3368@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3369@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3370@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3371@cindex output file format in linker script
3372The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3373output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3374exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3375(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3376line option takes precedence.
3377
3378You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3379formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3380This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3381desired endianness.
3382
3383If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3384will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3385output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3386used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3387
3388For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3389command:
3390@smallexample
3391OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3392@end smallexample
3393This says that the default format for the output file is
3394@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3395option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3396format.
3397
3398@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3399@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3400@cindex input file format in linker script
3401The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3402files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3403This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3404(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3405is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3406command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3407@end table
3408@end ifclear
3409
4a93e180
NC
3410@node REGION_ALIAS
3411@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3412@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3413@cindex region alias
3414@cindex region names
3415
3416Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3417@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3418
3419@smallexample
3420REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3421@end smallexample
3422
3423The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3424memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3425to memory regions. An example follows.
3426
3427Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3428memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3429that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3430non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3431access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3432read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3433sections:
3434
3435@itemize @bullet
3436@item
3437@code{.text} program code;
3438@item
3439@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3440@item
3441@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3442@item
3443@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3444@end itemize
3445
3446The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3447part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3448output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3449systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3450@code{C}:
3451@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3452@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3453@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3454@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3455@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3456@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3457@end multitable
3458The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3459loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3460the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3461the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3462
3463The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3464includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3465memory layout:
3466@smallexample
3467INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3468
3469SECTIONS
3470 @{
3471 .text :
3472 @{
3473 *(.text)
3474 @} > REGION_TEXT
3475 .rodata :
3476 @{
3477 *(.rodata)
3478 rodata_end = .;
3479 @} > REGION_RODATA
3480 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3481 @{
3482 data_start = .;
3483 *(.data)
3484 @} > REGION_DATA
3485 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3486 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3487 .bss :
3488 @{
3489 *(.bss)
3490 @} > REGION_BSS
3491 @}
3492@end smallexample
3493
3494Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3495regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3496variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3497@table @code
3498@item A
3499Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3500@smallexample
3501MEMORY
3502 @{
3503 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3504 @}
3505
3506REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3507REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3508REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3509REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3510@end smallexample
3511@item B
3512Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3513into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3514@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3515@smallexample
3516MEMORY
3517 @{
3518 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3519 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3520 @}
3521
3522REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3523REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3524REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3525REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3526@end smallexample
3527@item C
3528Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3529@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3530initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3531system start into the @code{RAM}.
3532@smallexample
3533MEMORY
3534 @{
3535 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3536 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3537 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3538 @}
3539
3540REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3541REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3542REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3543REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3544@end smallexample
3545@end table
3546
3547It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3548@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3549necessary:
3550@smallexample
3551#include <string.h>
3552
3553extern char data_start [];
3554extern char data_size [];
3555extern char data_load_start [];
3556
3557void copy_data(void)
3558@{
3559 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3560 @{
3561 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3562 @}
3563@}
3564@end smallexample
3565
252b5132 3566@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3567@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3568There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3569
3570@table @code
3571@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3572@kindex ASSERT
3573@cindex assertion in linker script
3574Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3575with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3576
fd1c4238
NC
3577Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3578take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3579inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3580for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3581symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3582
3583@smallexample
3584 .stack :
3585 @{
3586 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3587 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3588 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3589 @}
3590@end smallexample
3591
3592will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3593PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3594can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3595
3596@smallexample
3597 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3598 .stack :
3599 @{
3600 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3601 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3602 @}
3603@end smallexample
3604
3605will work.
3606
252b5132
RH
3607@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3608@kindex EXTERN
3609@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3610Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3611symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3612modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3613each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3614command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3615
3616@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3617@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3618@cindex common allocation in linker script
3619This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3620to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3621output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3622
4818e05f
AM
3623@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3624@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3625@cindex common allocation in linker script
3626This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3627command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3628to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3629
53d25da6
AM
3630@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3631@kindex INSERT
3632@cindex insert user script into default script
3633This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3634augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3635inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3636@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3637default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3638sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3639linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3640insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3641linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3642default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3643of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3644to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3645is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3646
3647@smallexample
3648SECTIONS
3649@{
3650 OVERLAY :
3651 @{
3652 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3653 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3654 @}
3655@}
3656INSERT AFTER .text;
3657@end smallexample
3658
252b5132
RH
3659@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3660@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3661@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3662This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3663references among certain output sections.
3664
3665In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3666using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3667will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3668errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3669a function defined in the other section.
3670
3671The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3672@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3673an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3674@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3675names.
3676
3677@ifclear SingleFormat
3678@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3679@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3680@cindex machine architecture
3681@cindex architecture
3682Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3683of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3684architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3685the @samp{-f} option.
3686@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3687
3688@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3689@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3690This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3691@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3692in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3693@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3694@end table
3695
3696@node Assignments
3697@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3698@cindex assignment in scripts
3699@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3700@cindex variables, defining
3701You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3702the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3703
3704@menu
3705* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3706* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3707* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3708* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3709* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3710@end menu
3711
3712@node Simple Assignments
3713@subsection Simple Assignments
3714
3715You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3716
3717@table @code
3718@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3719@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3720@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3721@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3722@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3723@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3724@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3725@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3726@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3727@end table
3728
3729The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3730@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3731defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3732
3733The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3734may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3735
3736The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3737
3738Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3739
3740You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3741statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3742section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3743
3744The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3745expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3746
3747Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3748assignments may be used:
3749
3750@smallexample
3751floating_point = 0;
3752SECTIONS
3753@{
3754 .text :
3755 @{
3756 *(.text)
3757 _etext = .;
3758 @}
156e34dd 3759 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3760 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3761@}
3762@end smallexample
3763@noindent
3764In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3765zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3766the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3767defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3768upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3769
eb8476a6
MR
3770@node HIDDEN
3771@subsection HIDDEN
3772@cindex HIDDEN
3773For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3774exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3775
3776Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3777@code{HIDDEN}:
3778
3779@smallexample
3780HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3781SECTIONS
3782@{
3783 .text :
3784 @{
3785 *(.text)
3786 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3787 @}
3788 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3789 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3790@}
3791@end smallexample
3792@noindent
3793In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3794
252b5132
RH
3795@node PROVIDE
3796@subsection PROVIDE
3797@cindex PROVIDE
3798In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3799only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3800the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3801@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3802@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3803@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3804@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3805@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3806
3807Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3808@smallexample
3809SECTIONS
3810@{
3811 .text :
3812 @{
3813 *(.text)
3814 _etext = .;
3815 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3816 @}
3817@}
3818@end smallexample
3819
3820In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3821underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3822the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3823underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3824If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3825linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3826
7af8e998
L
3827@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3828@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3829@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3830Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3831hidden and won't be exported.
3832
73ae6183
NC
3833@node Source Code Reference
3834@subsection Source Code Reference
3835
3836Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3837intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3838a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3839symbol that does not have a value.
3840
3841Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3842transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3843stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3844prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3845mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3846of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3847variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3848linker script variable might be referred to as:
3849
3850@smallexample
3851 extern int foo;
3852@end smallexample
3853
3854But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3855
3856@smallexample
3857 _foo = 1000;
3858@end smallexample
3859
3860In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3861transformation has taken place.
3862
3863When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3864things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3865in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3866second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3867table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3868contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3869value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3870
3871@smallexample
3872 int foo = 1000;
3873@end smallexample
3874
10bf6894 3875creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3876holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3877number 1000 is initially stored.
3878
3879When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3880first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3881memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3882So:
3883
3884@smallexample
3885 foo = 1;
3886@end smallexample
3887
3888looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3889associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3890address. Whereas:
3891
3892@smallexample
3893 int * a = & foo;
3894@end smallexample
3895
10bf6894 3896looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3897and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3898the variable @samp{a}.
3899
3900Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3901the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3902an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3903
3904@smallexample
3905 foo = 1000;
3906@end smallexample
3907
3908creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3909the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3910address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3911linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3912access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3913
3914Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3915you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3916use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3917section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3918linker script contains these declarations:
3919
3920@smallexample
3921@group
3922 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 3923 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
3924 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3925@end group
3926@end smallexample
3927
3928Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3929
3930@smallexample
3931@group
3932 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3933
73ae6183
NC
3934 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3935@end group
3936@end smallexample
3937
3938Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
3939Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
3940arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
3941
3942@smallexample
3943@group
3944 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
3945
3946 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
3947@end group
3948@end smallexample
3949
3950Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
3951operators.
73ae6183 3952
252b5132 3953@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3954@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3955@kindex SECTIONS
3956The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3957into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3958
3959The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3960@smallexample
3961SECTIONS
3962@{
3963 @var{sections-command}
3964 @var{sections-command}
3965 @dots{}
3966@}
3967@end smallexample
3968
3969Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3970
3971@itemize @bullet
3972@item
3973an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3974@item
3975a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3976@item
3977an output section description
3978@item
3979an overlay description
3980@end itemize
3981
3982The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3983@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3984those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3985understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3986the layout of the output file.
3987
3988Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3989below.
3990
3991If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3992linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3993section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3994input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3995example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3996in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3997
3998@menu
3999* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4000* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4001* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4002* Input Section:: Input section description
4003* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4004* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4005* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4006* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4007* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4008@end menu
4009
4010@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4011@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4012The full description of an output section looks like this:
4013@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4014@group
7e7d5768 4015@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4016 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4017 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4018 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4019 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4020 @{
4021 @var{output-section-command}
4022 @var{output-section-command}
4023 @dots{}
abc9061b 4024 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4025@end group
4026@end smallexample
4027
4028Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4029
4030The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4031name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4032The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4033the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4034The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4035
4036Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4037
4038@itemize @bullet
4039@item
4040a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4041@item
4042an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4043@item
4044data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4045@item
4046a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4047@end itemize
4048
4049@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4050@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4051@cindex name, section
4052@cindex section name
4053The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4054meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4055support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4056must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4057example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4058output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4059names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4060quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4061characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4062commas must be quoted.
4063
4064The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4065Discarding}.
4066
4067@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4068@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4069@cindex address, section
4070@cindex section address
4071The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4072address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4073is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4074
4075If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4076section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4077to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4078alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4079contained within the output section.
4080
4081The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4082
4083@itemize @bullet
4084@item
4085If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4086is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4087in that region.
4088
4089@item
4090If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4091regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4092section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4093be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4094
4095@item
4096If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4097the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4098counter.
4099@end itemize
4100
4101@noindent
4102For example:
4103
252b5132
RH
4104@smallexample
4105.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4106@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4107
252b5132
RH
4108@noindent
4109and
ea5cae92 4110
252b5132
RH
4111@smallexample
4112.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4113@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4114
252b5132
RH
4115@noindent
4116are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4117@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4118counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4119counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4120input sections.
252b5132
RH
4121
4122The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4123For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4124so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4125do something like this:
4126@smallexample
4127.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4128@end smallexample
4129@noindent
4130This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4131aligned upward to the specified value.
4132
4133Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4134location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4135sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4136
4137@node Input Section
36f63dca 4138@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4139@cindex input sections
4140@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4141The most common output section command is an input section description.
4142
4143The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4144You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4145in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4146map the input files into your memory layout.
4147
4148@menu
4149* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4150* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4151* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4152* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4153* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4154@end menu
4155
4156@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4157@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4158@cindex input section basics
4159An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4160by a list of section names in parentheses.
4161
4162The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4163describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4164
4165The most common input section description is to include all input
4166sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4167include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4168@smallexample
4169*(.text)
4170@end smallexample
4171@noindent
18625d54
CM
4172Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4173of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4174match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4175example:
252b5132 4176@smallexample
b4346c09 4177*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4178@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
4179will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4180@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
4181
4182There are two ways to include more than one section:
4183@smallexample
4184*(.text .rdata)
4185*(.text) *(.rdata)
4186@end smallexample
4187@noindent
4188The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4189@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4190first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4191they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4192@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4193@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4194
4195You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4196You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4197needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4198@smallexample
4199data.o(.data)
4200@end smallexample
4201
ae17ab41
CM
4202To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4203of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4204
4205Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4206
4207@smallexample
4208@group
4209SECTIONS @{
4210 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4211 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4212@}
4213@end group
4214@end smallexample
4215
4216In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4217input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4218@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4219@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4220whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4221
967928e9
AM
4222You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4223matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4224with no whitespace around the colon.
4225
4226@table @samp
4227@item archive:file
4228matches file within archive
4229@item archive:
4230matches the whole archive
4231@item :file
4232matches file but not one in an archive
4233@end table
4234
4235Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4236wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4237single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4238@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4239within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4240also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4241other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4242from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4243command.
4244
252b5132
RH
4245If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4246the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4247commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4248@smallexample
4249data.o
4250@end smallexample
4251
967928e9
AM
4252When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4253and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4254characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4255name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4256did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4257though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4258@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4259the archive search path.
4260
4261@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4262@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4263@cindex input section wildcards
4264@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4265@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4266@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4267In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4268name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4269
4270The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4271pattern for the file name.
4272
4273The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4274
4275@table @samp
4276@item *
4277matches any number of characters
4278@item ?
4279matches any single character
4280@item [@var{chars}]
4281matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4282character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4283@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4284@item \
4285quotes the following character
4286@end table
4287
4288When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4289will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4290Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4291exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4292@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4293a @samp{/} character.
4294
4295File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4296specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4297does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4298
4299If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4300appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4301will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4302sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4303@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4304@smallexample
4305.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4306.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4307@end smallexample
4308
bcaa7b3e 4309@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4310Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4311in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4312this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4313pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4314@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4315into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4316
bcaa7b3e
L
4317@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4318@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4319difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4320descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4321Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4322reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4323
02ecc8e9
L
4324@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4325@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4326difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4327ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4328encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4329
bcaa7b3e
L
4330@cindex SORT
4331@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4332
4333When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4334can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4335
4336@enumerate
4337@item
4338@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4339It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4340sections have the same name.
4341@item
4342@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4343It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4344sections have the same alignment.
4345@item
c0065db7 4346@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4347treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4348@item
4349@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4350is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4351@item
4352All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4353@end enumerate
4354
4355When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4356section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4357takes precedence over the command line option.
4358
4359If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4360command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4361treated as nested sorting command.
4362
4363@enumerate
4364@item
4365@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4366@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4367@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4368@item
4369@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4370@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4371@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4372@end enumerate
4373
4374If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4375command line option will be ignored.
4376
eda680f8
L
4377@cindex SORT_NONE
4378@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4379section sorting option.
4380
252b5132
RH
4381If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4382@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4383precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4384
4385This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4386files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4387sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4388The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4389with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4390linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4391@smallexample
4392@group
4393SECTIONS @{
4394 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4395 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4396 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4397 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4398@}
4399@end group
4400@end smallexample
4401
4402@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4403@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4404@cindex common symbol placement
4405@cindex uninitialized data placement
4406A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4407file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4408linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4409named @samp{COMMON}.
4410
4411You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4412other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4413particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4414input files are placed in another section.
4415
4416In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4417@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4418@smallexample
4419.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4420@end smallexample
4421
4422@cindex scommon section
4423@cindex small common symbols
4424Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4425example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4426symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4427different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4428the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4429symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4430to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4431locations.
4432
4433@cindex [COMMON]
4434You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4435notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4436@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4437
4438@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4439@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4440@cindex KEEP
4441@cindex garbage collection
4442When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4443it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4444This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4445with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4446@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4447
4448@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4449@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4450The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4451to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4452start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4453@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4454follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4455@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4456@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4457All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4458files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4459
4460@smallexample
4461@group
4462SECTIONS @{
4463 outputa 0x10000 :
4464 @{
4465 all.o
4466 foo.o (.input1)
4467 @}
36f63dca
NC
4468@end group
4469@group
252b5132
RH
4470 outputb :
4471 @{
4472 foo.o (.input2)
4473 foo1.o (.input1)
4474 @}
36f63dca
NC
4475@end group
4476@group
252b5132
RH
4477 outputc :
4478 @{
4479 *(.input1)
4480 *(.input2)
4481 @}
4482@}
4483@end group
a1ab1d2a 4484@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4485
4486@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4487@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4488@cindex data
4489@cindex section data
4490@cindex output section data
4491@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4492@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4493@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4494@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4495@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4496You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4497@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4498an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4499parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4500value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4501counter.
4502
4503The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4504store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4505bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4506stored.
4507
4508For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4509of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4510@smallexample
4511BYTE(1)
4512LONG(addr)
4513@end smallexample
4514
4515When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4516same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4517target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4518@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4519@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4520
4521If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4522which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4523When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4524true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4525endianness of the first input object file.
4526
36f63dca 4527Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4528between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4529@smallexample
4530SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4531@end smallexample
4532whereas this will work:
4533@smallexample
4534SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4535@end smallexample
4536
252b5132
RH
4537@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4538@cindex holes, filling
4539@cindex unspecified memory
4540You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4541current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4542otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4543gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4544with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4545necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4546point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4547than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4548different parts of an output section.
4549
4550This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4551value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4552@smallexample
563e308f 4553FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4554@end smallexample
4555
4556The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4557section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4558part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4559entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4560precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4561expression.
252b5132
RH
4562
4563@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4564@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4565There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4566commands.
4567
4568@table @code
4569@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4570@cindex input filename symbols
4571@cindex filename symbols
4572@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4573The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4574The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4575file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4576the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4577
4578This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4579normally used for any other object file format.
4580
4581@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4582@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4583@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4584@item CONSTRUCTORS
4585When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4586unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4587destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4588arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4589automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4590For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4591linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4592@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4593ignored for other object file formats.
4594
4595The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4596constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4597Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4598the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4599first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4600of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4601compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4602formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4603@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4604the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4605destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4606@code{exit}.
4607
4608For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4609arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4610addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4611and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4612linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4613runtime code expects to see.
4614
4615@smallexample
4616 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4617 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4618 *(.ctors)
4619 LONG(0)
4620 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4621 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4622 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4623 *(.dtors)
4624 LONG(0)
4625 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4626@end smallexample
4627
4628If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4629which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4630are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4631are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4632command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4633@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4634@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4635@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4636
4637Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4638and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4639need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4640scripts.
4641
4642@end table
4643
4644@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4645@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4646@cindex discarding sections
4647@cindex sections, discarding
4648@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4649The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4650This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4651may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4652@smallexample
49c13adb 4653.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4654@end smallexample
4655@noindent
4656will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4657@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4658sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4659space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4660too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4661space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4662@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4663@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4664This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4665
a0976ea4 4666The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4667on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4668symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4669the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4670section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4671
4672@cindex /DISCARD/
4673The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4674input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4675section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4676
4677@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4678@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4679@cindex output section attributes
4680We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4681like this:
0c71d759 4682
252b5132 4683@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4684@group
7e7d5768 4685@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4686 [AT(@var{lma})]
4687 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4688 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4689 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4690 @{
4691 @var{output-section-command}
4692 @var{output-section-command}
4693 @dots{}
562d3460 4694 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4695@end group
4696@end smallexample
0c71d759 4697
252b5132
RH
4698We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4699@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4700remaining section attributes.
4701
a1ab1d2a 4702@menu
252b5132
RH
4703* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4704* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4705* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4706* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4707* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4708* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4709* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4710* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4711@end menu
4712
4713@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4714@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4715Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4716parentheses. The following types are defined:
4717
4718@table @code
4719@item NOLOAD
4720The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4721loaded into memory when the program is run.
4722@item DSECT
4723@itemx COPY
4724@itemx INFO
4725@itemx OVERLAY
4726These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4727rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4728marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4729section when the program is run.
4730@end table
4731
4732@kindex NOLOAD
4733@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4734@cindex loading, preventing
4735The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4736the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4737the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4738@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4739need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4740@smallexample
4741@group
4742SECTIONS @{
4743 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4744 @dots{}
4745@}
4746@end group
4747@end smallexample
4748
4749@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4750@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4751@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4752@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4753@cindex load address
4754@cindex section load address
4755Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4756@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4757@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4758specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4759address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4760
ea5cae92
NC
4761The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4762specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4763takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4764load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4765region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4766
4767If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4768section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4769load address:
4770
4771@itemize @bullet
4772@item
4773If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4774the LMA address as well.
4775
4776@item
4777If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4778
4779@item
4780Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4781with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4782section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4783VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4784the last section in the located region.
4785
4786@item
4787If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4788that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4789
4790@item
4791If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4792section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4793@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4794
4795@cindex ROM initialized data
4796@cindex initialized data in ROM
4797This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4798example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4799called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4800@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4801even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4802uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4803defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4804counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4805
4806@smallexample
4807@group
4808SECTIONS
4809 @{
4810 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4811 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4812 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4813 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4814 .bss 0x3000 :
4815 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4816@}
4817@end group
4818@end smallexample
4819
4820The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4821this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4822the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4823how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4824script.
4825
4826@smallexample
4827@group
4828extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4829char *src = &_etext;
4830char *dst = &_data;
4831
ea5cae92
NC
4832/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4833while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4834 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4835
ea5cae92 4836/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4837for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4838 *dst = 0;
4839@end group
4840@end smallexample
4841
bbf115d3
L
4842@node Forced Output Alignment
4843@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4844@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4845@cindex forcing output section alignment
4846@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4847You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4848alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4849intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4850
7e7d5768
AM
4851@node Forced Input Alignment
4852@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4853@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4854@cindex forcing input section alignment
4855@cindex input section alignment
4856You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4857SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4858sections, whether larger or smaller.
4859
0c71d759
NC
4860@node Output Section Constraint
4861@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4862@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4863@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4864@cindex constraints on output sections
4865You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4866of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4867read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4868@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4869
252b5132 4870@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4871@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4872@kindex >@var{region}
4873@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4874@cindex memory regions and sections
4875You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4876using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4877
4878Here is a simple example:
4879@smallexample
4880@group
4881MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4882SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4883@end group
4884@end smallexample
4885
4886@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4887@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4888@kindex :@var{phdr}
4889@cindex section, assigning to program header
4890@cindex program headers and sections
4891You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4892using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4893one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4894assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4895@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4896linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4897
4898Here is a simple example:
4899@smallexample
4900@group
4901PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4902SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4903@end group
4904@end smallexample
4905
4906@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4907@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4908@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4909@cindex section fill pattern
4910@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4911You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4912@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4913(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4914within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4915alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4916necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4917of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4918an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4919fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4920other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4921pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4922expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4923
4924You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4925output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4926
4927Here is a simple example:
4928@smallexample
4929@group
563e308f 4930SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4931@end group
4932@end smallexample
4933
4934@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4935@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4936@kindex OVERLAY
4937@cindex overlays
4938An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4939are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4940the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4941copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4942required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4943can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4944than another.
4945
4946Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4947@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4948output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4949command is as follows:
4950@smallexample
4951@group
4952OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4953 @{
4954 @var{secname1}
4955 @{
4956 @var{output-section-command}
4957 @var{output-section-command}
4958 @dots{}
4959 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4960 @var{secname2}
4961 @{
4962 @var{output-section-command}
4963 @var{output-section-command}
4964 @dots{}
4965 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4966 @dots{}
abc9061b 4967 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4968@end group
4969@end smallexample
4970
4971Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4972section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4973section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4974those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4975except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4976sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4977
abc9061b
CC
4978The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4979the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4980
252b5132
RH
4981The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4982addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4983memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4984whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4985and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4986and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4987
56dd11f0
NC
4988If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4989references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4990the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4991sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4992@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4993
4994For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4995provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4996defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4997@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4998the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4999within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5000symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5001
5002At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5003the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5004
5005Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5006@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5007@smallexample
5008@group
5009 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5010 @{
5011 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5012 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5013 @}
5014@end group
5015@end smallexample
5016@noindent
5017This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5018address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5019@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5020following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5021@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5022@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5023
5024C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5025like the following.
5026
5027@smallexample
5028@group
5029 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5030 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5031 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5032@end group
5033@end smallexample
5034
5035Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5036everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5037example could have been written identically as follows.
5038
5039@smallexample
5040@group
5041 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5042 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5043 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5044 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5045 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5046 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5047 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5048@end group
5049@end smallexample
5050
5051@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5052@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5053@kindex MEMORY
5054@cindex memory regions
5055@cindex regions of memory
5056@cindex allocating memory
5057@cindex discontinuous memory
5058The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5059memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5060
5061The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5062memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5063may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5064can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5065set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5066regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5067around to fit into the available regions.
5068
127fcdff
AB
5069A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5070however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5071specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5072@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5073@smallexample
5074@group
a1ab1d2a 5075MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5076 @{
5077 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5078 @dots{}
5079 @}
5080@end group
5081@end smallexample
5082
5083The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5084region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5085Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5086with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5087must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5088add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5089command.
252b5132
RH
5090
5091@cindex memory region attributes
5092The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5093whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5094not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5095@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5096section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5097the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5098them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5099
5100The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5101@table @samp
5102@item R
5103Read-only section
5104@item W
5105Read/write section
5106@item X
5107Executable section
5108@item A
5109Allocatable section
5110@item I
5111Initialized section
5112@item L
5113Same as @samp{I}
5114@item !
c09e9a8c 5115Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5116@end table
5117
5118If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5119@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5120attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5121in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5122attributes.
5123
5124@kindex ORIGIN =
5125@kindex o =
5126@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5127The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5128the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5129cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5130abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5131@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5132
5133@kindex LENGTH =
5134@kindex len =
5135@kindex l =
5136The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5137region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5138be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5139@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5140
5141In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5142available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5143and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5144linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5145is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5146or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5147explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5148region.
5149
5150@smallexample
5151@group
a1ab1d2a 5152MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5153 @{
5154 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5155 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5156 @}
5157@end group
5158@end smallexample
5159
5160Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5161specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5162@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5163a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5164output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5165was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5166the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5167output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5168region, the linker will issue an error message.
5169
3ec57632 5170It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5171expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5172@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5173
5174@smallexample
5175@group
c0065db7 5176 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5177@end group
5178@end smallexample
5179
252b5132
RH
5180@node PHDRS
5181@section PHDRS Command
5182@kindex PHDRS
5183@cindex program headers
5184@cindex ELF program headers
5185@cindex program segments
5186@cindex segments, ELF
5187The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5188@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5189loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5190program with the @samp{-p} option.
5191
5192When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5193reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5194program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5195This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5196interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5197
5198The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5199in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5200precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5201the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5202not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5203
5204The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5205generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5206ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5207
5208This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5209@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5210
5211@smallexample
5212@group
5213PHDRS
5214@{
5215 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5216 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5217@}
5218@end group
5219@end smallexample
5220
5221The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5222of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5223header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5224with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5225must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5226is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5227
5228Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5229system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5230specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5231sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5232attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5233Section Phdr}.
5234
5235It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5236merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5237repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5238contain the section.
5239
5240If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5241then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5242not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5243convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5244placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5245default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5246segment at all.
5247
5248@kindex FILEHDR
5249@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5250You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5251the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5252The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5253file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5254include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5255segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5256these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5257
5258The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5259value of the keyword.
5260
5261@table @asis
5262@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5263Indicates an unused program header.
5264
5265@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5266Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5267the file.
5268
5269@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5270Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5271
5272@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5273Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5274found.
5275
5276@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5277Indicates a segment holding note information.
5278
5279@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5280A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5281ABI.
5282
5283@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5284Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5285
5286@item @var{expression}
5287An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5288be used for types not defined above.
5289@end table
5290
5291You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5292in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5293@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5294Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5295output section attribute.
5296
5297The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5298which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5299explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5300an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5301header.
5302
5303Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5304headers used on a native ELF system.
5305
5306@example
5307@group
5308PHDRS
5309@{
5310 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5311 interp PT_INTERP ;
5312 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5313 data PT_LOAD ;
5314 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5315@}
5316
5317SECTIONS
5318@{
5319 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5320 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5321 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5322 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5323 @dots{}
5324 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5325 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5326 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5327 @dots{}
5328@}
5329@end group
5330@end example
5331
5332@node VERSION
5333@section VERSION Command
5334@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5335@cindex symbol versions
5336@cindex version script
5337@cindex versions of symbols
5338The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5339only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5340symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5341a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5342shared library.
5343
5344You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5345you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5346also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5347
5348The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5349@smallexample
5350VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5351@end smallexample
5352
5353The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5354Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5355version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5356version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5357version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5358scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5359library.
5360
5361The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5362examples.
5363
5364@smallexample
5365VERS_1.1 @{
5366 global:
5367 foo1;
5368 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5369 old*;
5370 original*;
5371 new*;
252b5132
RH
5372@};
5373
5374VERS_1.2 @{
5375 foo2;
5376@} VERS_1.1;
5377
5378VERS_2.0 @{
5379 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5380 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5381 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5382 "f(int, double)";
5383 @};
252b5132
RH
5384@} VERS_1.2;
5385@end smallexample
5386
5387This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5388version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5389The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5390a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5391of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5392symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5393is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5394in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5395However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5396name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5397
5398Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5399depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5400to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5401
5402Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5403depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5404and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5405
5406When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5407specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5408unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5409unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5410somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5411wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5412wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5413set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5414ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5415
5416The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5417they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5418could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5419However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5420
0f6bf451 5421Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5422in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5423symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5424won't.
5425
5426@smallexample
7c9c73be 5427@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5428@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5429
252b5132
RH
5430When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5431symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5432requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5433shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5434loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5435linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5436application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5437way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5438all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5439search for each symbol reference.
5440
5441The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5442doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5443that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5444functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5445the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5446required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5447that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5448versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5449the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5450
5451There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5452first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5453source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5454script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5455maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5456@smallexample
5457__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5458@end smallexample
5459@noindent
5460in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5461be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5462The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5463@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5464takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5465
5466The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5467function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5468an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5469version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5470linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5471
5472To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5473source file. Here is an example:
5474
5475@smallexample
5476__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5477__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5478__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5479__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5480@end smallexample
5481
5482In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5483unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5484example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5485@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5486
5487When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5488some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5489this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5490@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5491declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5492you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5493
5494If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5495within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5496(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5497specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5498
cb840a31
L
5499You can also specify the language in the version script:
5500
5501@smallexample
5502VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5503@end smallexample
5504
c0065db7 5505The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5506The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5507demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5508patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5509@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5510
86043bbb
MM
5511Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5512described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5513or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5514the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5515whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5516cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5517might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5518should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5519expect when you upgrade.
5520
252b5132
RH
5521@node Expressions
5522@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5523@cindex expressions
5524@cindex arithmetic
5525The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5526that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5527expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5528host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5529
5530You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5531
5532The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5533expressions.
5534
5535@menu
5536* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5537* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5538* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5539* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5540* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5541* Operators:: Operators
5542* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5543* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5544* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5545@end menu
5546
5547@node Constants
5548@subsection Constants
5549@cindex integer notation
5550@cindex constants in linker scripts
5551All constants are integers.
5552
5553As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5554octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5555hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5556@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5557@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5558value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5559
5560@cindex scaled integers
5561@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5562@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5563@cindex suffixes for integers
5564@cindex integer suffixes
5565In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5566constant by
5567@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5568@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5569@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5570@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5571@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5572@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5573@tex
5574${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5575@end tex
5576@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5577respectively. For example, the following
5578all refer to the same quantity:
5579
252b5132 5580@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5581_fourk_1 = 4K;
5582_fourk_2 = 4096;
5583_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5584_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5585@end smallexample
5586
8a308ae8
NC
5587Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5588conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5589
0c71d759
NC
5590@node Symbolic Constants
5591@subsection Symbolic Constants
5592@cindex symbolic constants
5593@kindex CONSTANT
5594It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5595the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5596
5597@table @code
5598@item MAXPAGESIZE
5599@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5600The target's maximum page size.
5601
5602@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5603@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5604The target's default page size.
5605@end table
5606
5607So for example:
5608
5609@smallexample
9d5777a3 5610 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5611@end smallexample
5612
5613will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5614supported by the target.
5615
252b5132
RH
5616@node Symbols
5617@subsection Symbol Names
5618@cindex symbol names
5619@cindex names
5620@cindex quoted symbol names
5621@kindex "
5622Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5623and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5624Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5625specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5626keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5627@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5628"SECTION" = 9;
5629"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5630@end smallexample
5631
5632Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5633to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5634whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5635
ecca9871
L
5636@node Orphan Sections
5637@subsection Orphan Sections
5638@cindex orphan
5639Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5640are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5641script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5642output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5643placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5644attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5645same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5646If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5647at the end of the file.
5648
5649For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5650well as section flag.
5651
c005eb9e
AB
5652The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5653(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5654output sections an orphan is placed in.
5655
41911f68 5656If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5657the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5658__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5659section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5660orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5661representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5662character.
5663
252b5132
RH
5664@node Location Counter
5665@subsection The Location Counter
5666@kindex .
5667@cindex dot
5668@cindex location counter
5669@cindex current output location
5670The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5671current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5672location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5673within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5674anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5675
5676@cindex holes
5677Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5678moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5679location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5680and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5681doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5682
5683@smallexample
5684SECTIONS
5685@{
5686 output :
5687 @{
5688 file1(.text)
5689 . = . + 1000;
5690 file2(.text)
5691 . += 1000;
5692 file3(.text)
563e308f 5693 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5694@}
5695@end smallexample
5696@noindent
5697In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5698located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5699followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5700@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5701@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5702specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5703
5c6bbab8
NC
5704@cindex dot inside sections
5705Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5706current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5707statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5708absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5709however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5710not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5711
5712@smallexample
5713SECTIONS
5714@{
5715 . = 0x100
5716 .text: @{
5717 *(.text)
5718 . = 0x200
5719 @}
5720 . = 0x500
5721 .data: @{
5722 *(.data)
5723 . += 0x600
5724 @}
5725@}
5726@end smallexample
5727
5728The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5729and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5730the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5731much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5732move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5733and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5734the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5735the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5736
b5666f2f
AM
5737@cindex dot outside sections
5738Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5739output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5740needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5741
5742@smallexample
5743SECTIONS
5744@{
5745 start_of_text = . ;
5746 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5747 end_of_text = . ;
5748
5749 start_of_data = . ;
5750 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5751 end_of_data = . ;
5752@}
5753@end smallexample
5754
5755If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5756not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5757between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5758should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5759blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5760the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5761sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5762statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5763special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5764place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5765as follows:
5766
5767@smallexample
5768SECTIONS
5769@{
5770 start_of_text = . ;
5771 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5772 end_of_text = . ;
5773
5774 start_of_data = . ;
5775 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5776 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5777 end_of_data = . ;
5778@}
5779@end smallexample
5780
5781This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5782@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5783placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5784assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5785a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5786section. So you could write:
5787
5788@smallexample
5789SECTIONS
5790@{
5791 start_of_text = . ;
5792 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5793 end_of_text = . ;
5794
5795 . = . ;
5796 start_of_data = . ;
5797 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5798 end_of_data = . ;
5799@}
5800@end smallexample
5801
5802Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5803@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5804
252b5132
RH
5805@need 2000
5806@node Operators
5807@subsection Operators
5808@cindex operators for arithmetic
5809@cindex arithmetic operators
5810@cindex precedence in expressions
5811The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5812the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5813@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5814@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5815@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5816@smallexample
5817precedence associativity Operators Notes
5818(highest)
58191 left ! - ~ (1)
58202 left * / %
58213 left + -
58224 left >> <<
58235 left == != > < <= >=
58246 left &
58257 left |
58268 left &&
58279 left ||
582810 right ? :
582911 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5830(lowest)
5831@end smallexample
5832Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5833(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5834(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5835@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5836@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5837@tex
5838\vskip \baselineskip
5839%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5840\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5841\hrule
5842\halign
5843{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5844height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5845&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5846height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5847\noalign{\hrule}
5848height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5849&highest&&&&&\cr
5850% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5851&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5852&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5853&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5854&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5855&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5856&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5857&7&&left&&|&\cr
5858&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5859&9&&left&&||&\cr
5860&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5861&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5862&lowest&&&&&\cr
5863height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5864\hrule}
5865@end tex
5866@iftex
5867{
5868@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5869@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5870@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5871}
5872@end iftex
5873@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5874
5875@node Evaluation
5876@subsection Evaluation
5877@cindex lazy evaluation
5878@cindex expression evaluation order
5879The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5880an expression when absolutely necessary.
5881
5882The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5883address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5884regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5885as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5886
5887However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5888until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5889other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5890for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5891
5892The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5893assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5894allocation.
5895
5896Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5897@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5898
5899If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5900available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5901following
5902@smallexample
5903@group
5904SECTIONS
5905 @{
a1ab1d2a 5906 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5907 @{ *(.text) @}
5908 @}
5909@end group
5910@end smallexample
5911@noindent
5912will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5913address}.
5914
5915@node Expression Section
5916@subsection The Section of an Expression
5917@cindex expression sections
5918@cindex absolute expressions
5919@cindex relative expressions
5920@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5921@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5922@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5923Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5924relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5925using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5926value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5927symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5928operations.
5929
abf4be64
AM
5930Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5931section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5932address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5933@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5934functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5935One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5936(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5937differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5938versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5939section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5940Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5941absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5942given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5943everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5944
5945In the following simple example,
252b5132 5946
7542af2a
AM
5947@smallexample
5948@group
5949SECTIONS
5950 @{
5951 . = 0x100;
5952 __executable_start = 0x100;
5953 .data :
5954 @{
5955 . = 0x10;
5956 __data_start = 0x10;
5957 *(.data)
5958 @}
5959 @dots{}
5960 @}
5961@end group
5962@end smallexample
252b5132 5963
7542af2a
AM
5964both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5965address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5966@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5967section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5968
5c3049d2
AM
5969For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5970addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5971
5972@itemize @bullet
5973@item
c05f749e
AM
5974Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5975operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5976absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5977@item
7542af2a
AM
5978Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5979relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5980and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5981@item
c05f749e
AM
5982Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5983in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5984address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5985before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5986@end itemize
5987
5988The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5989
5990@itemize @bullet
5991@item
5992An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5993@item
5994The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5995@item
9bc8bb33 5996The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5997relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5998(after above conversions) is also a number.
5999@item
6000The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6001relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6002section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6003@item
6004The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6005conversions) is an absolute address.
6006@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6007
6008You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6009to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6010create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6011section @samp{.data}:
6012@smallexample
6013SECTIONS
6014 @{
6015 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6016 @}
6017@end smallexample
6018@noindent
6019If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6020@samp{.data} section.
6021
7542af2a
AM
6022Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6023particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6024
252b5132
RH
6025@node Builtin Functions
6026@subsection Builtin Functions
6027@cindex functions in expressions
6028The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6029use in linker script expressions.
6030
6031@table @code
6032@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6033@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6034@cindex expression, absolute
6035Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6036of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6037value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6038normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6039
6040@item ADDR(@var{section})
6041@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6042@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6043Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6044script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6045the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6046@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6047@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6048the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6049@smallexample
6050@group
6051SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6052 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6053 @{
252b5132
RH
6054 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6055 @dots{}
6056 @}
6057 .output :
6058 @{
6059 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6060 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6061 @}
6062@dots{} @}
6063@end group
6064@end smallexample
6065
876f4090
NS
6066@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6067@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6068@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6069@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6070@cindex round up location counter
6071@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6072@cindex round up expression
6073@cindex align expression
6074Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6075to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6076doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6077arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6078expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6079equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6080
6081Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6082next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6083variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6084input sections:
252b5132
RH
6085@smallexample
6086@group
6087SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6088 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6089 *(.data)
6090 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6091 @}
6092@dots{} @}
6093@end group
6094@end smallexample
6095@noindent
6096The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6097a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6098a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6099of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6100
6101The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6102
362c1d1a
NS
6103@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6104@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6105@cindex section alignment
6106Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6107been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6108evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6109the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6110value in that section.
6111@smallexample
6112@group
6113SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6114 .output @{
6115 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6116 @dots{}
6117 @}
6118@dots{} @}
6119@end group
6120@end smallexample
6121
252b5132
RH
6122@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6123@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6124This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6125scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6126section.
6127
2d20f7bf
JJ
6128@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6129@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6130This is equivalent to either
6131@smallexample
6132(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6133@end smallexample
6134or
6135@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6136(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6137 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6138@end smallexample
6139@noindent
6140depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6141for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6142@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6143If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6144memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6145bytes in the on-disk file.
6146
6147This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6148any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6149@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6150be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6151working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6152
6153@noindent
6154Example:
6155@smallexample
6156 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6157@end smallexample
6158
6159@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6160@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6161This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6162evaluation purposes.
6163
6164@smallexample
6165 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6166@end smallexample
6167
a4f5ad88
JJ
6168@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6169@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6170This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6171@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6172When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6173does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6174@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6175boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6176it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6177@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6178padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6179section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6180
6181@smallexample
6182 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6183@end smallexample
6184
252b5132
RH
6185@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6186@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6187@cindex symbol defaults
6188Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6189defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6190return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6191default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6192shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6193the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6194existed, its value is preserved:
6195
6196@smallexample
6197@group
6198SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6199 .text : @{
6200 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6201 @dots{}
6202 @}
6203 @dots{}
6204@}
6205@end group
6206@end smallexample
6207
3ec57632
NC
6208@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6209@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6210Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6211
252b5132
RH
6212@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6213@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6214@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6215Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6216Section LMA}).
6217
2e53f7d6
NC
6218@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6219@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6220Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6221@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6222
252b5132
RH
6223@kindex MAX
6224@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6225Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6226
6227@kindex MIN
6228@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6229Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6230
6231@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6232@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6233@cindex unallocated address, next
6234Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6235This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6236use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6237output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6238
3ec57632
NC
6239@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6240@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6241Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6242
ba916c8a
MM
6243@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6244@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6245Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6246value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6247@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6248will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6249can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6250``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6251name.
6252
252b5132
RH
6253@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6254@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6255@cindex section size
6256Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6257been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6258evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6259@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6260@smallexample
6261@group
6262SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6263 .output @{
6264 .start = . ;
6265 @dots{}
6266 .end = . ;
6267 @}
6268 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6269 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6270@dots{} @}
6271@end group
6272@end smallexample
6273
6274@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6275@itemx sizeof_headers
6276@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6277@cindex header size
6278Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6279information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6280this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6281choose, to facilitate paging.
6282
6283@cindex not enough room for program headers
6284@cindex program headers, not enough room
6285When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6286@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6287number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6288addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6289additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6290room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6291the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6292script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6293you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6294command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6295@end table
6296
6297@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6298@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6299@cindex implicit linker scripts
6300If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6301an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6302linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6303linker will report an error.
6304
6305An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6306
6307Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6308assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6309commands.
6310
6311Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6312at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6313read. This can affect archive searching.
6314
6315@ifset GENERIC
6316@node Machine Dependent
6317@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6318
6319@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6320@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6321sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6322functionality are not listed.
6323
6324@menu
36f63dca
NC
6325@ifset H8300
6326* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6327@end ifset
6328@ifset I960
6329* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6330@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6331@ifset M68HC11
6332* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6333@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6334@ifset ARM
6335* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6336@end ifset
6337@ifset HPPA
6338* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6339@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6340@ifset M68K
6341* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6342@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6343@ifset MIPS
6344* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6345@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6346@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6347* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6348@end ifset
2469cfa2 6349@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6350* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6351@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6352@ifset NDS32
6353* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6354@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6355@ifset NIOSII
6356* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6357@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6358@ifset POWERPC
6359* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6360@end ifset
6361@ifset POWERPC64
6362* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6363@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6364@ifset SPU
6365* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6366@end ifset
74459f0e 6367@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6368* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6369@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6370@ifset WIN32
6371* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6372@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6373@ifset XTENSA
6374* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6375@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6376@end menu
6377@end ifset
6378
252b5132
RH
6379@ifset H8300
6380@ifclear GENERIC
6381@raisesections
6382@end ifclear
6383
6384@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6385@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6386
6387@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6388For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6389you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6390
6391@table @emph
6392@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6393@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6394@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6395targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6396program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6397respectively.
6398
6399@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6400@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6401@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6402@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6403sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6404page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6405(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6406@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6407top page of memory).
1502569c 6408
81f5558e
NC
6409@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6410indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6411displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6412the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6413@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6414whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6415range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6416
1502569c 6417@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6418@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6419biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6420which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6421page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6422(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6423@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6424the top page of memory).
6425
6426@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6427@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
642832 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6429changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6430(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6431@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6432the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6433@end table
6434
6435@ifclear GENERIC
6436@lowersections
6437@end ifclear
6438@end ifset
6439
36f63dca 6440@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6441@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6442@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6443@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6444@node Renesas
6445@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6446
c2dcd04e
NC
6447@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6448H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6449options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6450@end ifset
6451@end ifclear
6452
6453@ifset I960
6454@ifclear GENERIC
6455@raisesections
6456@end ifclear
6457
6458@node i960
6459@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6460
6461@cindex i960 support
6462
6463You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6464specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6465family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6466incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6467linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6468libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6469search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6470
6471For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6472well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6473paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6474the names
6475
6476@smallexample
6477@group
6478try
6479libtry.a
6480tryca
6481libtryca.a
6482@end group
6483@end smallexample
6484
6485@noindent
6486The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6487two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6488
6489You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6490the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6491use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6492specifies a library.
6493
6494@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6495@cindex relaxing on i960
6496@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6497you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6498@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6499them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6500instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6501instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6502target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6503not itself call any subroutines).
6504
6505@ifclear GENERIC
6506@lowersections
6507@end ifclear
6508@end ifset
6509
6510@ifset ARM
6511@ifclear GENERIC
6512@raisesections
6513@end ifclear
6514
93fd0973
SC
6515@ifset M68HC11
6516@ifclear GENERIC
6517@raisesections
6518@end ifclear
6519
6520@node M68HC11/68HC12
6521@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6522
6523@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6524
6525@subsection Linker Relaxation
6526
6527For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6528optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6529
6530@table @emph
6531@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6532@item relaxing address modes
6533@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6534targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6535program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6536respectively.
6537
6538@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6539transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6540page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6541
6542@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6543When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6544of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6545addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6546@code{bset} instructions.
6547
6548@end table
6549
6550@subsection Trampoline Generation
6551
6552@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6553@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6554For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6555call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6556will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6557trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6558case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6559point to the function trampoline.
6560
6561@ifclear GENERIC
6562@lowersections
6563@end ifclear
6564@end ifset
6565
36f63dca 6566@node ARM
3674e28a 6567@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6568
6569@cindex ARM interworking support
6570@kindex --support-old-code
6571For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6572between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6573been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6574line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6575libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6576option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6577given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6578which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6579the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6580non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6581
6582@cindex thumb entry point
6583@cindex entry point, thumb
6584@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6585The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6586@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6587But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6588branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6589executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6590
ce11ba6c
KT
6591@cindex PE import table prefixing
6592@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6593The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6594the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6595element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6596import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6597
e489d0ae
PB
6598@cindex BE8
6599@kindex --be8
6600The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6601executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6602objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6603option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6604little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6605
3674e28a
PB
6606@cindex TARGET1
6607@kindex --target1-rel
6608@kindex --target1-abs
6609The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6610@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6611or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6612and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6613
6614@cindex TARGET2
6615@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6616The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6617@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6618meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6619@table @samp
6620@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6621@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6622@item abs
6623@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6624@item got-rel
6625@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6626@end table
6627
319850b4
JB
6628@cindex FIX_V4BX
6629@kindex --fix-v4bx
6630The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6631specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6632interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6633also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6634
6635In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6636linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6637@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6638
6639In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6640relocations are ignored.
6641
845b51d6
PB
6642@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6643@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6644Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6645relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6646
6647@smallexample
6648TST rM, #1
6649MOVEQ PC, rM
6650BX Rn
6651@end smallexample
6652
6653This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6654and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6655condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6656
33bfe774
JB
6657@cindex USE_BLX
6658@kindex --use-blx
6659The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6660BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6661situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6662code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6663each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6664
6665This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6666specify it if you are using that target.
6667
c6dd86c6
JB
6668@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6669@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6670The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6671bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6672instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6673to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6674the support code can read the intended values.
6675
6676The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6677intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6678and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6679intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6680full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6681you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6682
6683If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6684enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6685@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6686mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6687vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6688@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6689
6690If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6691potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6692such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6693first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6694instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6695the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6696are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6697
2de70689
MGD
6698@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6699@kindex --fix-arm1176
6700@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6701The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6702in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6703are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6704unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6705
9d5777a3 6706Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6707Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6708http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6709
a504d23a
LA
6710@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6711@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6712
6713The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6714workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6715the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6716off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6717the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6718core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6719integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6720VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6721
6722The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6723necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6724
6725The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6726@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6727STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6728linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6729@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6730
6731If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6732potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6733such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6734replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6735branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6736then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6737
6738The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6739the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6740
6741The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6742they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6743there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6744occurs.
6745
6746The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6747PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6748large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6749cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6750occurs.
6751
bf21ed78
MS
6752@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6753@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6754The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6755warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6756enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6757linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6758using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6759not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6760
6761@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6762@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6763The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6764warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6765@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6766linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6767using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6768
726150b7
NC
6769@cindex PIC_VENEER
6770@kindex --pic-veneer
6771The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6772ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6773is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6774@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6775
6776@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6777@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6778The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6779code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6780perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6781placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6782controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6783The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6784duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6785group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6786code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6787where they should be placed.
6788
6789The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6790@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6791placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6792branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6793placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6794value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6795exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6796A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6797linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6798from the input sections.
6799
6800The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6801@samp{N = +1}.
6802
1a51c1a4
NC
6803Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6804only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6805otherwise.
6806
1db37fe6
YG
6807@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6808@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6809@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6810The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6811
6812The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6813
68fcca92
JW
6814@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6815@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6816@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6817The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6818
6819Please contact ARM for further details.
6820
1db37fe6
YG
6821@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6822@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6823@cindex Merging exidx entries
6824The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6825
6826@kindex --long-plt
6827@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6828The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6829which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6830entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6831
36f63dca
NC
6832@ifclear GENERIC
6833@lowersections
6834@end ifclear
6835@end ifset
6836
6837@ifset HPPA
6838@ifclear GENERIC
6839@raisesections
6840@end ifclear
6841
6842@node HPPA ELF32
6843@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6844@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6845@kindex --multi-subspace
6846When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6847import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6848The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6849stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6850multiple sub-spaces.
6851
6852@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6853@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6854Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6855stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6856@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6857sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6858a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6859the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6860conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6861prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6862A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6863branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6864@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6865@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6866detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6867positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6868
6869Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6870single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6871create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6872large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6873
6874@ifclear GENERIC
6875@lowersections
6876@end ifclear
6877@end ifset
6878
7fb9f789
NC
6879@ifset M68K
6880@ifclear GENERIC
6881@raisesections
6882@end ifclear
6883
6884@node M68K
6885@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6886
6887@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6888@kindex --got=@var{type}
6889The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6890The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6891@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6892the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6893@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6894entries only at non-negative offsets.
6895@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6896entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6897support such GOTs.
6898@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6899output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6900file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6901files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6902
6903@ifclear GENERIC
6904@lowersections
6905@end ifclear
6906@end ifset
6907
833794fc
MR
6908@ifset MIPS
6909@ifclear GENERIC
6910@raisesections
6911@end ifclear
6912
6913@node MIPS
6914@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6915
6916@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6917@kindex --insn32
6918@kindex --no-insn32
6919The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6920microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6921in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6922used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6923or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6924including 16-bit ones where possible.
6925
6926@ifclear GENERIC
6927@lowersections
6928@end ifclear
6929@end ifset
6930
36f63dca
NC
6931@ifset MMIX
6932@ifclear GENERIC
6933@raisesections
6934@end ifclear
6935
6936@node MMIX
6937@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6938For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6939@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6940understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6941can translate between the two formats.
6942
6943There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6944Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6945registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6946equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6947@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6948global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6949this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6950symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6951
7a2de473
HPN
6952Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6953@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6954The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6955of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6956
6957Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6958are left out from an mmo file.
6959
6960@ifclear GENERIC
6961@lowersections
6962@end ifclear
6963@end ifset
6964
6965@ifset MSP430
6966@ifclear GENERIC
6967@raisesections
6968@end ifclear
6969
6970@node MSP430
6971@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6972For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6973will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6974just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6975
6976@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6977The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6978
6979@table @code
6980@item @samp{.vectors}
6981Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6982
6983@item @samp{.bootloader}
6984Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6985in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6986
6987@item @samp{.infomem}
6988Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6989this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6990
c0065db7 6991@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6992This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6993in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6994
6995@item @samp{.noinit}
6996Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6997
c0065db7 6998The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6999@end table
7000
7001@ifclear GENERIC
7002@lowersections
7003@end ifclear
7004@end ifset
7005
35c08157
KLC
7006@ifset NDS32
7007@ifclear GENERIC
7008@raisesections
7009@end ifclear
7010
7011@node NDS32
7012@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7013@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7014For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7015relaxes objects according to these options.
7016
7017@table @code
7018@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7019Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7020
7021@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7022Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7023
7024@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7025Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7026
7027@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7028Export the EX9 table after linking.
7029
7030@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7031Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7032
7033@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7034Update the existing EX9 table.
7035
7036@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7037Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7038
7039@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7040Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7041
7042@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7043Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7044
7045@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7046Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7047@end table
7048
7049@ifclear GENERIC
7050@lowersections
7051@end ifclear
7052@end ifset
7053
78058a5e
SL
7054@ifset NIOSII
7055@ifclear GENERIC
7056@raisesections
7057@end ifclear
7058
7059@node Nios II
7060@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7061@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7062@kindex --relax on Nios II
7063
7064Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7065transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7066which may result in @command{ld} giving
7067@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7068The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7069trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7070outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7071trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7072be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7073larger than 256MB.
7074
7075The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7076is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7077@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7078locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7079source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7080register as a temporary.
7081
7082Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7083relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7084option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7085
7086@ifclear GENERIC
7087@lowersections
7088@end ifclear
7089@end ifset
7090
2a60a7a8
AM
7091@ifset POWERPC
7092@ifclear GENERIC
7093@raisesections
7094@end ifclear
7095
7096@node PowerPC ELF32
7097@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7098@cindex PowerPC long branches
7099@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7100Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7101displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7102@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7103@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7104the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7105section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7106section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7107@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7108both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7109considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7110
7111@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7112@table @option
7113@cindex PowerPC PLT
7114@kindex --bss-plt
7115@item --bss-plt
7116Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7117generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7118the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7119writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7120@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7121PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7122compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7123BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7124
016687f8
AM
7125@kindex --secure-plt
7126@item --secure-plt
7127@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7128@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7129when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7130layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7131style BSS PLT.
7132
2a60a7a8
AM
7133@cindex PowerPC GOT
7134@kindex --sdata-got
7135@item --sdata-got
7136The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7137sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7138@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7139section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7140@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7141@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7142@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7143@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7144PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7145pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7146GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7147really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7148
7149@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7150@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7151@item --emit-stub-syms
7152This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7153symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7154
7155@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7156@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7157@item --no-tls-optimize
7158PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7159sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7160disable the optimization.
7161@end table
7162
7163@ifclear GENERIC
7164@lowersections
7165@end ifclear
7166@end ifset
7167
7168@ifset POWERPC64
7169@ifclear GENERIC
7170@raisesections
7171@end ifclear
7172
7173@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7174@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7175
7176@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7177@table @option
7178@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7179@kindex --stub-group-size
7180@item --stub-group-size
7181Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7182by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7183@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7184sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7185a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7186the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7187conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7188prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7189A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7190branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7191@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7192@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7193detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7194positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7195
7196Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7197single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7198create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7199large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7200
7201@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7202@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7203@item --emit-stub-syms
7204This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7205symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7206
7207@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7208@kindex --dotsyms
7209@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7210@item --dotsyms
7211@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7212These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7213in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7214function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7215code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7216properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7217to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7218@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7219dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7220feature.
7221
7ae4ea7d
AM
7222@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7223@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7224@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7225@item --save-restore-funcs
7226@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7227These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7228provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7229@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7230function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7231link.
7232
2a60a7a8
AM
7233@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7234@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7235@item --no-tls-optimize
7236PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7237sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7238disable the optimization.
7239
7c9cf415
AM
7240@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7241@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7242@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7243@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7244@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7245These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7246stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7247an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7248@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7249stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7250option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7251Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7252slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7253application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7254normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7255
2a60a7a8
AM
7256@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7257@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7258@item --no-opd-optimize
7259PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7260corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7261the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7262Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7263
7264@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7265@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7266@item --non-overlapping-opd
7267Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7268@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7269the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7270entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7271
7272@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7273@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7274@item --no-toc-optimize
7275PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7276entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7277reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7278marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7279marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7280relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7281unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7282reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7283discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7284reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7285code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7286optimization.
7287
7288@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7289@kindex --no-multi-toc
7290@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7291If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7292@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7293where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7294entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7295total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7296grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7297TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7298calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7299help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
730064K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7301Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7302
7303@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7304@kindex --no-toc-sort
7305@item --no-toc-sort
7306By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7307happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7308placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7309with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7310referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7311@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7312results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7313off this feature.
7314
7315@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7316@kindex --plt-align
7317@kindex --no-plt-align
7318@item --plt-align
7319@itemx --no-plt-align
7320Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7321padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7322specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7323that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7324stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7325
7326@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7327@kindex --plt-static-chain
7328@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7329@item --plt-static-chain
7330@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7331Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7332chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7333chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7334
7335@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7336@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7337@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7338@item --plt-thread-safe
7339@itemx --no-thread-safe
7340With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7341lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7342another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7343order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7344memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7345barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7346looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7347seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7348default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7349@end table
7350
7351@ifclear GENERIC
7352@lowersections
7353@end ifclear
7354@end ifset
7355
49fa1e15
AM
7356@ifset SPU
7357@ifclear GENERIC
7358@raisesections
7359@end ifclear
7360
7361@node SPU ELF
7362@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7363
7364@cindex SPU ELF options
7365@table @option
7366
7367@cindex SPU plugins
7368@kindex --plugin
7369@item --plugin
7370This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7371
7372@cindex SPU overlays
7373@kindex --no-overlays
7374@item --no-overlays
7375Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7376regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7377@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7378turns off all this special overlay handling.
7379
7380@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7381@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7382@item --emit-stub-syms
7383This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7384symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7385
7386@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7387@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7388@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7389This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7390function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7391on calls to non-overlay regions.
7392
7393@cindex SPU local store size
7394@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7395@item --local-store=lo:hi
7396@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7397the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7398range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7399
c0065db7 7400@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7401@kindex --stack-analysis
7402@item --stack-analysis
7403SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7404unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7405under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7406@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7407@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7408determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7409for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7410for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7411for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7412find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7413and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7414under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7415dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7416is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7417and calls will be given.
7418
c0065db7 7419@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7420@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7421@item --emit-stack-syms
7422This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7423in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7424These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7425functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7426functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7427such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7428The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7429@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7430@end table
7431
7432@ifclear GENERIC
7433@lowersections
7434@end ifclear
7435@end ifset
7436
36f63dca
NC
7437@ifset TICOFF
7438@ifclear GENERIC
7439@raisesections
7440@end ifclear
7441
7442@node TI COFF
7443@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7444@cindex TI COFF versions
7445@kindex --format=@var{version}
7446The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7447TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7448also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7449format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7450header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7451
7452@ifclear GENERIC
7453@lowersections
7454@end ifclear
7455@end ifset
7456
2ca22b03
NC
7457@ifset WIN32
7458@ifclear GENERIC
7459@raisesections
7460@end ifclear
7461
7462@node WIN32
7463@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7464
c0065db7 7465This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7466See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7467command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7468
7469@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7470@cindex import libraries
7471@item import libraries
69da35b5 7472The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7473libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7474regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7475archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7476support for creating such libraries provided with the
7477@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7478
c0065db7
RM
7479@item exporting DLL symbols
7480@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7481The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7482
7483@table @emph
7484@item using auto-export functionality
7485@cindex using auto-export functionality
7486By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7487which is controlled by the following command line options:
7488
0a5d968e
NC
7489@itemize
7490@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7491@item --exclude-symbols
7492@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7493@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7494@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7495@end itemize
7496
09e2aba4
DK
7497When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7498(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7499symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7500often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7501private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7502options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7503exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7504final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7505
7506If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7507command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7508if either of the following are true:
7509
7510@itemize
7511@item A DEF file is used.
7512@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7513@end itemize
dc8465bf 7514
c0065db7
RM
7515@item using a DEF file
7516@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7517Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7518an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7519exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7520name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7521command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7522
7523@example
7524gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7525@end example
7526
0a5d968e
NC
7527Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7528@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7529
dc8465bf
NC
7530Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7531
7532@example
4b5bd4e7 7533LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7534
7535EXPORTS
7536foo
7537bar
7538_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7539another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7540var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7541doo = foo == foo2
7542eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7543@end example
dc8465bf 7544
7fcab871 7545This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7546symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7547alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7548by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7549@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7550@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7551export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7552in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7553symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7554
6b31ad16
DS
7555The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7556name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7557the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7558
b45619c0
NC
7559When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7560library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7561@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7562executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7563
7564With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7565specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7566non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7567
7568If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7569or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7570filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7571
4b5bd4e7
DS
7572The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7573
7574@example
7575EXPORTS
7576 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7577 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7578 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7579@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7580
7581Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7582@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7583@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7584@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7585Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7586@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7587string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7588
7589The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7590
7591@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7592will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7593by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7594linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7595library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7596
7597@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7598The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7599the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7600@code{*_imp__foo}).
7601
7602@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7603well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7604read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7605variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7606the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7607extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7608application will behave unexpectedly.
7609
7610@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7611it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7612symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7613API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7614the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7615
4b5bd4e7
DS
7616See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7617other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7618
7619@cindex creating a DEF file
7620While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7621with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7622
7623@item Using decorations
7624@cindex Using decorations
7625Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7626itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7627declared as:
7628
7629@example
7630__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7631__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7632@end example
7633
7634All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7635any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7636this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7637the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7638
7639Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7640decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7641instead:
7642
7643@example
7644__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7645__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7646@end example
7647
c0065db7
RM
7648This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7649when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7650variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7651code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7652of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7653omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7654@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7655information.
c0065db7 7656@end table
dc8465bf 7657
2ca22b03
NC
7658@cindex automatic data imports
7659@item automatic data imports
7660The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7661by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7662compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7663issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7664code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7665c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7666initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7667decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7668platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7669command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7670The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7671suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7672trigger the feature's use.
7673
c0065db7 7674auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7675additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7676
c0065db7 7677"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7678documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7679
c0065db7
RM
7680The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7681occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7682One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7683below.
7684
7685@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7686For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7687object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7688offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7689field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7690in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7691without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7692The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7693references.
7694
c0065db7
RM
7695The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7696be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7697themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7698runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7699compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7700support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7701run without error on an older system.
7702
c0065db7
RM
7703@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7704enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7705
7706@cindex direct linking to a dll
7707@item direct linking to a dll
7708The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7709including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7710libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7711traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7712libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7713function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7714though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7715storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7716tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7717large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7718
c0065db7 7719Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7720@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7721of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7722perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7723select the dll instead of an import library.
7724
2ca22b03 7725
69da35b5
NC
7726For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7727to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7728
7729@example
45e948fe
NC
7730libxxx.dll.a
7731xxx.dll.a
7732libxxx.a
7733xxx.lib
69da35b5 7734cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7735libxxx.dll
7736xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7737@end example
7738
69da35b5
NC
7739before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7740
c0065db7
RM
7741(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7742where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7743@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7744file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7745@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7746
c0065db7
RM
7747Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7748@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7749was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7750various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7751could coexist on the same machine.
7752
2ca22b03
NC
7753The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7754applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7755libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7756
7757@example
7758bin/
7759 cygxxx.dll
7760lib/
7761 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7762 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7763@end example
7764
c0065db7
RM
7765Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7766done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7767
77681. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7769@example
7770gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7771@end example
2ca22b03 7772
69da35b5
NC
7773However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7774(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7775@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7776not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7777
2ca22b03
NC
77782. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7779directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7780should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7781making the app/dll.
7782
7783@example
7784ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7785@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7786
7787Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7788
7789@example
7790gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7791@end example
69da35b5
NC
7792
7793This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7794perfectly legal
7795
7796@example
7797bin/
7798 cygxxx-5.dll
7799lib/
c0065db7 7800 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7801@end example
7802
dc8465bf 7803Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7804even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7805@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7806
7807Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7808wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7809
78101. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7811work with auto-imported data.
7812
dc8465bf
NC
78132. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7814import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7815symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7816for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7817possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7818
45e948fe
NC
78193. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7820critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7821in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7822stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7823
69da35b5 7824So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7825true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7826a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7827binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7828massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7829requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7830will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7831
c0065db7 7832@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7833@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7834@item adding additional names
7835Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7836A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7837exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7838when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7839import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7840
c0065db7 7841@example
dc8465bf
NC
7842LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7843
7844EXPORTS
c0065db7 7845foo
dc8465bf 7846_foo = foo
c0065db7 7847@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7848
7849The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7850
7851Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7852source code using the "weak" attribute:
7853
c0065db7
RM
7854@example
7855void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7856void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7857@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7858
7859See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7860symbols.
7861
7862@item renaming symbols
7863Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7864kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7865@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7866DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7867created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7868
c0065db7 7869@example
dc8465bf
NC
7870LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7871
7872EXPORTS
7873_foo = foo
c0065db7 7874@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7875
7876The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7877@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7878@end table
dc8465bf 7879
0a5d968e 7880Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7881unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7882If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7883@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7884that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7885@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7886renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7887to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7888the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7889In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7890which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7891
7892@cindex weak externals
7893@item weak externals
7894The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7895weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7896defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7897are three variants of weak externals:
7898@itemize
7899@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7900called lazy externals.
7901@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7902This form is not presently implemented.
7903@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7904implemented.
7905@end itemize
7906As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7907are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7908uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7909
7910@cindex aligned common symbols
7911@item aligned common symbols
7912As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7913desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7914the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7915carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7916by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7917tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7918but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7919warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 7920
2ca22b03
NC
7921@end table
7922
7923@ifclear GENERIC
7924@lowersections
7925@end ifclear
7926@end ifset
7927
e0001a05
NC
7928@ifset XTENSA
7929@ifclear GENERIC
7930@raisesections
7931@end ifclear
7932
7933@node Xtensa
7934@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7935
7936@cindex Xtensa processors
7937The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7938@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7939specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7940keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7941example, with the command:
7942
7943@smallexample
7944SECTIONS
7945@{
7946 .text : @{
7947 *(.literal .text)
7948 @}
7949@}
7950@end smallexample
7951
7952@noindent
7953@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7954and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7955literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7956interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7957group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7958files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7959and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7960
43cd72b9 7961@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7962@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7963Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7964provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7965is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7966literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7967will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7968location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7969the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7970unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7971@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7972range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7973
7974For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7975to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7976instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7977instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7978instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7979@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7980hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7981By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7982switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7983density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7984instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7985performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7986linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7987a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7988
7989The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7990control the linker:
7991
7992@cindex Xtensa options
7993@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7994@item --size-opt
7995When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7996more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7997no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7998alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7999preserve the correctness of the code.
8000@end table
e0001a05
NC
8001
8002@ifclear GENERIC
8003@lowersections
8004@end ifclear
8005@end ifset
8006
252b5132
RH
8007@ifclear SingleFormat
8008@node BFD
8009@chapter BFD
8010
8011@cindex back end
8012@cindex object file management
8013@cindex object formats available
8014@kindex objdump -i
8015The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8016These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8017object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8018format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8019it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8020associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8021object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8022(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8023list all the formats available for your configuration.
8024
8025@cindex BFD requirements
8026@cindex requirements for BFD
8027As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8028several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8029BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8030formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8031been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8032BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8033may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8034
8035One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8036mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8037useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8038conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8039
8040@menu
8041* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8042@end menu
8043
8044@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8045@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8046@cindex opening object files
8047@include bfdsumm.texi
8048@end ifclear
8049
8050@node Reporting Bugs
8051@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8052@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8053@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8054
ff5dcc92 8055Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8056
8057Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8058it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8059to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8060work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8061@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8062
8063In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8064information that enables us to fix the bug.
8065
8066@menu
8067* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8068* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8069@end menu
8070
8071@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8072@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8073@cindex bug criteria
8074
8075If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8076
8077@itemize @bullet
8078@cindex fatal signal
8079@cindex linker crash
8080@cindex crash of linker
8081@item
8082If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8083@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8084
8085@cindex error on valid input
8086@item
ff5dcc92 8087If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8088
8089@cindex invalid input
8090@item
ff5dcc92 8091If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8092may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8093object files are correct.
8094
8095@item
8096If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8097improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8098@end itemize
8099
8100@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8101@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8102@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8103@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8104
8105A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8106products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8107recommend you contact that organization first.
8108
8109You can find contact information for many support companies and
8110individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8111distribution.
8112
ad22bfe8 8113@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8114Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8115@value{BUGURL}.
8116@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8117
8118The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8119@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8120fact or leave it out, state it!
8121
8122Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8123problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8124assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8125matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8126the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8127location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8128were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8129into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8130specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8131and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8132
8133Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8134the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8135on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8136
8137Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8138bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8139respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8140You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8141
8142To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8143
8144@itemize @bullet
8145@item
ff5dcc92 8146The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8147the @samp{--version} argument.
8148
8149Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8150the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8151
8152@item
ff5dcc92 8153Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8154patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8155
8156@item
8157The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8158version number.
8159
8160@item
ff5dcc92 8161What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8162``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8163
8164@item
8165The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8166observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8167list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8168sufficient.
8169
8170If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8171and then we might not encounter the bug.
8172
8173@item
8174A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8175bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8176provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8177bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8178state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8179requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8180we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8181attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8182
8183If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8184@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8185object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8186@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8187how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8188
8189@item
8190A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8191incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8192
ff5dcc92 8193Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8194will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8195not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8196a chance to make a mistake.
8197
8198Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8199say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8200copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8201C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8202and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8203fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8204you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8205any conclusion from our observations.
8206
8207@item
ff5dcc92 8208If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8209diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8210@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8211If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8212context, not by line number.
8213
8214The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8215sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8216@end itemize
8217
8218Here are some things that are not necessary:
8219
8220@itemize @bullet
8221@item
8222A description of the envelope of the bug.
8223
8224Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8225which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8226changes will not affect it.
8227
8228This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8229will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8230with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8231We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8232
8233Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8234of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8235output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8236less time, and so on.
8237
8238However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8239report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8240
8241@item
8242A patch for the bug.
8243
8244A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8245the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8246a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8247to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8248
ff5dcc92 8249Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8250construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8251through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8252able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8253fixed.
8254
8255And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8256patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8257help us to understand.
8258
8259@item
8260A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8261
8262Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8263things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8264@end itemize
8265
8266@node MRI
8267@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8268@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8269To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8270linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8271alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8272described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8273simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8274@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8275linker commands; these commands are described here.
8276
8277In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8278file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8279features to make use of them.
8280
8281You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8282@samp{-c} command-line option.
8283
8284Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8285command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8286blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8287MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8288issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8289
8290Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8291
8292You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8293lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8294The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8295
8296@table @code
8297@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8298@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8299@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8300Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8301the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8302@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8303your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8304script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8305commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8306input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8307@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8308
8309@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8310@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8311Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8312in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8313
8314@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8315
8316@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8317@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8318Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8319@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8320
8321@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8322@item BASE @var{expression}
8323Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8324absolute addresses) in the output file.
8325
8326@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8327@item CHIP @var{expression}
8328@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8329This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8330
8331@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8332@item END
8333This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8334
8335@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8336@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8337Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8338language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8339
8340@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8341@item
252b5132
RH
8342S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8343
8344@item
8345IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8346
8347@item
8348COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8349@samp{COFF}
8350@end enumerate
8351
8352@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8353@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8354Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8355@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8356
8357The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8358same line, with no change in its effect.
8359
8360@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8361@item LOAD @var{filename}
8362@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8363Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8364same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8365command line.
8366
8367@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8368@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8369@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8370MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8371option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8372
8373@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8374@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8375@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8376Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8377order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8378script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8379sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8380file, in the order specified.
8381
8382@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8383@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8384@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8385@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8386Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8387@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8388
8389@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8390@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8391@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8392@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8393You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8394specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8395If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8396@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8397@end table
8398
793c5807
NC
8399@node GNU Free Documentation License
8400@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8401@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8402
370b66a1
CD
8403@node LD Index
8404@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8405
8406@printindex cp
8407
8408@tex
7ca01ed9 8409% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8410% meantime:
8411\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8412\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8413\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8414\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8415\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8416\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8417\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8418\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8419\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8420% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8421@end tex
8422
252b5132 8423@bye
This page took 1.233385 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.